3 Dtheory

PDS 3D Theory
Users Guide
Document Number Version Date Pages

DPDS3-PB-200010A PDS 7.1 April 2002 1-300
DPDS3-PB-200010B PDS 7.3 October 2004 Cover/Notice
Copyright
Copyright 1984-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to
applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information
of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law,
and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without
proper authorization.
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-
7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software
Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the
License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial
Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth
in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its
contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties.
Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication
date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change
without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph
Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of this license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on
equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF
THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO
THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools,
MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and
Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a
registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias
Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
________________ If You Need Assistance
If You Need Assistance
Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraphs
products, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.
Support
For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to
http://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp.
If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most up-
to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at
http://www.intergraph.com.
Intergraph Directory
The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If you
are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.
Intergraph General Information

All countries 1-256-730-2000
Training Registration
1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only)
1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)
Mailing Address
Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore
300 Intergraph Way
Madison, Alabama 35758
U.S.A.
You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.
3
________________
Documentation Contacts
We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other
educational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation
or where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by:
Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore

Documentation Manager
300 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
4
________________ Table of Contents
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ 3
Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. 3
Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 11
Related Products ................................................................................................................... 11

Document Organization ........................................................................................................ 11
General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 13
Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 14

Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 15
1. What is the Plant Design System? ............................................................................................... 17
1.1 What are the 2D modules? .................................................................................................. 18
1.1.1 Process Flow Diagram (PFD) ................................................................................. 18

1.1.2 Process & Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) .......................................................... 18
1.1.3 Instruments and Instrument Loops .......................................................................... 19
1.2 What are the 3D modules? .................................................................................................. 20
1.2.1 Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) ............................................................................ 20

1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus (FWP) ........................................................................................ 20
1.2.3 Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) .................................................................... 21
1.2.4 Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) ....................................................................... 21
1.2.5 Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) ................................................................................ 22
1.2.6 PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_Stress) ............................................................ 22
1.2.7 Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) ............................................................ 22
1.2.8 PDS Isometric Interface (PD_ISO, PD_ISOGEN) ................................................. 23
1.2.9 Report Manager (PD_Report) ................................................................................. 23
1.2.10 Project Engineer HVAC (PE-HVAC) ................................................................... 24
1.2.11 EE Raceway Modeling .......................................................................................... 24
1.2.12 Design Review Integrator (PD_Review) ............................................................... 25
1.3 Project Setup ....................................................................................................................... 26
1.3.1 System Setup ........................................................................................................... 26

1.3.2 2D Setup .................................................................................................................. 27
1.3.3 3D Setup .................................................................................................................. 28
1.3.4 About licensing ....................................................................................................... 28
1.4 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ 29

1.5 Working in Three Dimensions ............................................................................................ 31
5
________________
PDS 3D Theory April 2002
1.5.1 Working Units ......................................................................................................... 35

1.5.2 Recommended Working Units - English ................................................................ 36
1.5.3 Recommended Working Units - Metric .................................................................. 36
1.5.4 Reasoning ................................................................................................................ 37
1.5.5 3D Coordinate Systems ........................................................................................... 38
1.5.5.1 Plant Coordinate System .......................................................................... 38
1.5.6 Design Volume Coordinate System ........................................................................ 43

1.5.7 Examples ................................................................................................................. 45
1.5.7.1 DVCS Oriented From Plant North ........................................................... 47
2. Database Overview ...................................................................................................................... 51
2.1 PDS and the Relational Interface System (RIS) ................................................................. 52

2.2 PDS System Configurations ................................................................................................ 54
2.2.1 Client/Server Relationship ...................................................................................... 54
2.3 PDS 3D Databases .............................................................................................................. 56
2.3.1 Database Information .............................................................................................. 57
2.3.1.1 Attribute Types ......................................................................................... 58

2.3.1.2 Code-Listed Attributes ............................................................................. 58
2.4 Database Definition Files .................................................................................................... 59
2.4.1 Project Control Database ......................................................................................... 59

2.4.2 Design Database ...................................................................................................... 73
2.4.3 Reference Database ................................................................................................. 87
3. Reference Data ............................................................................................................................. 91
3.1 Piping Job Specification ...................................................................................................... 94
3.1.1 Piping Materials Class Data .................................................................................... 94

3.1.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data ................................................................... 96
3.1.2.1 Connect Point Data .................................................................................. 96
3.1.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data ........................................................................ 98

3.1.4 Instrument Component Specification Data ............................................................. 99
3.1.5 Tap Properties Data ................................................................................................. 100
3.1.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data ................................................. 101
3.1.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data .............................................................. 102
3.1.8 PJS Tables and Functions ....................................................................................... 104
6
3.2 Graphic Commodity Data and Physical Dimension Data ................................................... 106
3.3 Material Description Data ................................................................................................... 107
3.4 Standard Note Library ......................................................................................................... 109
3.5 Label Description Library ................................................................................................... 109
3.6 Piping Assembly Library .................................................................................................... 110
4. How PDS Works .......................................................................................................................... 113
4.1 What Happens When I Place a Component? ...................................................................... 113
4.1.1 Spec Access ............................................................................................................. 115

4.1.2 Piping Materials Class Data .................................................................................... 115
4.1.3 Piping Commodity Data .......................................................................................... 120
4.1.4 Table Access ........................................................................................................... 124
4.1.5 Symbol Processors .................................................................................................. 126
4.1.6 Sub-Symbol Processor ............................................................................................ 127
4.1.7 Physical Data Definitions ........................................................................................ 128
4.1.8 Parametric Shape Definitions .................................................................................. 132
4.1.9 Physical Data ........................................................................................................... 135
4.1.9.1 Generic Tables ......................................................................................... 136

4.1.9.2 Specific Tables ......................................................................................... 137
4.2 Placing Components On Existing Segments ....................................................................... 138
4.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table ................................................................................. 138

4.2.2 Bend Deflection Table ............................................................................................ 140
4.2.3 Branch Insertion Tables .......................................................................................... 140
4.2.4 Placement Examples ............................................................................................... 142
5. Creating 3D Models ..................................................................................................................... 145
5.1 Modeling Setup Requirements ............................................................................................ 145
5.1.1 Project Setup ........................................................................................................... 145

5.1.2 Reference Data Setup .............................................................................................. 146
5.1.3 Seed Files ................................................................................................................ 146
5.1.4 Model Files ............................................................................................................. 147
5.1.5 Level Control and Graphical Symbology ............................................................... 147
5.1.6 Level and Symbology Defaults ............................................................................... 148
5.2 Graphics Environment for PDS 3D ..................................................................................... 150
5.2.1 Working with the Graphical User Interface ............................................................ 151

5.2.2 Common Tools on Forms ....................................................................................... 157
5.2.2.1 Base Form ................................................................................................ 158
5.2.3 3D Seed Data ........................................................................................................... 160
7
________________
5.3 Creating Equipment Models ............................................................................................... 164
5.3.1 Functions of PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) ............................................... 164

5.3.2 About the Reference Database (RDB) .................................................................... 165
5.3.3 Equipment Model Seed Data .................................................................................. 165
5.3.4 Equipment Modeling Environment ......................................................................... 169
5.3.5 Equipment Modeling Concepts ............................................................................... 171
5.3.6 Activating the Orientation Tee ................................................................................ 173
5.4 Equipment Modeling Commands ....................................................................................... 174
5.4.1 Equipment Manipulation Commands ..................................................................... 174

5.4.2 Component Manipulation Commands .................................................................... 174
5.4.3 Nozzle Manipulation ............................................................................................... 174
5.4.4 Review/Revise Commands ..................................................................................... 174
5.4.5 Define Commands ................................................................................................... 174
5.4.6 Miscellaneous Commands ...................................................................................... 174
5.4.7 Secondary Commands ............................................................................................. 175
5.5 Creating Piping Models ...................................................................................................... 176
5.5.1 Piping Model Seed Data .......................................................................................... 178

5.5.2 Graphic Concepts for Piping Design ....................................................................... 187
5.5.2.1 Piping Segments ....................................................................................... 187

5.5.2.2 Active Placement Point ............................................................................ 188
5.5.2.3 Coordinate System Indicator and Orientation Tee ................................... 188
5.5.3 Orientation Tee ........................................................................................................ 189
5.5.3.1 Piping Connect Points .............................................................................. 190
5.6 Piping Design Commands ................................................................................................... 191
5.6.1 Placement Commands ............................................................................................. 191

5.6.2 Revision Commands ............................................................................................... 192
5.6.3 Component Revision ............................................................................................... 192
5.6.4 Segment Vertex Commands .................................................................................... 192
5.6.5 Piping Revision ....................................................................................................... 192
5.6.6 Model Data .............................................................................................................. 193
5.6.7 Review Data ............................................................................................................ 193
5.6.8 Revise Data ............................................................................................................. 193
5.6.9 Analyze Data ........................................................................................................... 193
6. P&ID to Piping Data Transfer ...................................................................................................... 195
6.1 Database Requirements ....................................................................................................... 195

6.2 P&ID Correlation Table ...................................................................................................... 197
6.3 P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup ................................................................................. 202
6.4 P&ID Node Numbers .......................................................................................................... 204
8
6.5 Update Segment Data from P&ID ...................................................................................... 205
6.5.1 Update by Node Number ........................................................................................ 206

6.5.2 Transfer by Equipment Number and Nozzle Number ............................................ 206
6.5.3 Update From Active P&I Drawing ......................................................................... 207
6.6 P&ID Data ........................................................................................................................... 208

6.7 Name From P&ID ............................................................................................................... 209
6.8 P&ID Data Comparison Options ........................................................................................ 210
7. Detecting and Managing Interferences ........................................................................................ 211
7.1 Interference Checking Process Overview ........................................................................... 211

7.2 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ 215
7.2.1 Understanding Design Areas and Volumes ............................................................ 216
7.3 Setting Up a System to Support Interference Detection ..................................................... 221

7.4 Understanding Interference Envelopes ............................................................................... 223
7.4.1 Understanding Interference Checking ..................................................................... 224

7.4.2 Understanding Interference Plotting ....................................................................... 230
7.4.3 Understanding Interference Reporting .................................................................... 230
8. Creating Material Takeoffs and Other Reports ............................................................................ 231
8.1 Reporting Process ................................................................................................................ 231

8.2 Maintaining Report Definition Data ................................................................................... 231
8.2.1 Understanding Report Files and Records ................................................................ 232
8.2.1.1 Format File ............................................................................................... 232

8.2.1.2 Discrimination Data File .......................................................................... 232
8.2.1.3 Report Record .......................................................................................... 233
8.2.1.4 Report Output ........................................................................................... 234
8.3 Processing Reports .............................................................................................................. 235

8.4 Report Types ....................................................................................................................... 235
8.5 Report Format File .............................................................................................................. 237
8.5.1 Format File Syntax .................................................................................................. 237

8.5.2 Definitions ............................................................................................................... 238
8.5.3 Output Fields ........................................................................................................... 241
8.5.4 Sample Format Files ............................................................................................... 242
8.6 What Happens When I Report On a Component? .............................................................. 246

8.7 Material Takeoff Reporting (Report Manager) ................................................................... 252
8.8 Understanding Implied Items .............................................................................................. 256
9
________________
8.8.1 Mating Implied Items .............................................................................................. 256

8.8.2 * Spec Implied Items ............................................................................................ 256
8.8.3 + Table Implied Items .......................................................................................... 257
8.9 Material Takeoff Options .................................................................................................... 259

8.10 Labels in Material Descriptions ........................................................................................ 262
8.10.1 Create Label Attribute Data ................................................................................ 265
9. Extracting Isometric Drawings .................................................................................................... 269
9.1 Overview of Isometric Extraction ....................................................................................... 271
9.1.1 The Intergraph Interface to ISOGEN ...................................................................... 271

9.1.2 ASCII to Binary Conversion ................................................................................... 272
9.1.3 ISOGEN .................................................................................................................. 272
9.2 Batch Software Organization .............................................................................................. 273
9.2.1 The Batch Job Input File ......................................................................................... 273

9.2.2 Line Processing (pdsidf) ......................................................................................... 275
9.2.3 The ISOGEN Interface ............................................................................................ 275
9.2.4 ISOGEN .................................................................................................................. 276
9.2.5 Plotting .................................................................................................................... 276
10. Creating Orthographic Drawings ............................................................................................... 277
10.1 Drawing Manager Setup ................................................................................................. 279

10.2 Drawing Seed Data ......................................................................................................... 284
10.3 Using Labels in Drawings ............................................................................................... 288
10.3.1 Label Types ....................................................................................................... 288

10.3.2 Label Definition Data ........................................................................................ 290
10.3.3 Drawing View Specific Labels ......................................................................... 290
10.3.4 Displayable Attribute Label .............................................................................. 291
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 293
10
________________ Preface
Preface
This PDS 3D Theory Users Guide is designed as an aid for students attending the PDS 3D Theory Class
presented by Intergraph Corporation Education Center and is a supplement to the standard product
documentation. It is structured according to the course outline and can be used as a study guide.
PDS 3D Theory describes basic conceptual information about the PDS 3D modules. It also describes
information which should be considered before starting a PDS project.
Related Products
For more information on related topics, consult the following documents:
Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide (DEA5027)
Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide (DEA5028)
Piping Component Data Reference Guide (DEA5056)
Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design, PD_Model) Reference Guide (DEA5029)
PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) Users Guide (DEA5017)
Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) Users Guide (DEA5030)
Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) Users Guide (DEA5032)
PDS ISOGEN Reference Guide (DEA5040)
Document Organization
This document contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Chapter 2 - Database Overview
Chapter 3 - Reference Data
Chapter 4 - How PDS Works
Chapter 5 - Creating PDS Models
Chapter 6 - P&ID to Piping Data Transfer
11
________________
Chapter 7 - Detecting and Managing Interferences
Chapter 8 - Creating Material Takeoffs and Other Reports
Chapter 9 - Extracting Isometric Drawings
Chapter 10 - Creating Orthographic Drawings
12
________________ Preface
General Conventions
This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain
words or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to
scan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identify
commonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.
Typefaces
Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software is
doing. For example,
The text is placed in the viewing plane.
Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Command
paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example,
Choose File > Open to load a new file.
Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken by
the user. For example,
Select first segment of alignment
Bold Typewriter
Indicates what you should literally type in. For example,
Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file.
Normal Typewriter
Indicates an actual file or directory name. For example,
The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.
13
________________
Symbols
This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special
information:
<C> Command button

<D> Data button (usually the left mouse button)
<R> Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button)
<T> Tentative button (usually the center mouse button)
Note Important supplemental information.
Warning Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.
Technical tip or information provides information on what the software is

doing or how it processes information.
Map or path shows you how to get to a specific command or form.
More information indicates there is additional or related information.
Need a hint used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing the
exercises.
Keyboard Conventions
The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and
describes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through the
use of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations.
ALT Alternate key

CTRL Control key
DEL Delete key
ENTER Enter key
ESC Escape key
CTRL+z To hold down the Control key and press Z.

ESC,k To press the Escape key, then K.
14
________________ Preface
Terminology
Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an
action. For example,
Click Apply to save the changes.
Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking

it with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. After
selecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. For
example,
Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete to
remove it from the directory.
In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such as

selecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphic
elements from the design file. For example,
Select the line string to define the graphic template.
Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design

file. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-select
by double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-held
cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, you
tentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord.
Double-click To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held

cursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you are
clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.
For example,
Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface.
Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or
hand-held cursor.
Type To key a character string into a text box.
Key in To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the
default action.
In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data will

enter the data and move the cursor to the next field.
15
________________
16
________________ What is the Plant Design System?
1. What is the Plant Design

System?
1. PDS Overview
Intergraphs plant design software can be used to design any type of plantfrom
petrochemical plants, offshore platforms, chemical and pharmaceutical plants, consumer
products (food, beverages, cosmetics, soap, paper, and so forth), to power plants, waste water
treatment plants, and cogeneration facilities.
Specifically, the Plant Design System (PDS) integrates many discipline-specific software
modules; these modules automate the many phases of a plant design project. Instrument Data
Manager is one of these modules.
Designing a plant with the modular Intergraph-Zydex plant design software system comprises
four phases:
1. Project Setup - 2D and 3D design files, project files, databases.
2. Preliminary Design - feasibility studies, cost estimates, general layouts and process
flow diagrams.
3. Detailed Design - process, instrumentation, piping layouts, material control.
4. Design Review - 3D model walk-through.
17
________________
1.1 What are the 2D modules?

PDS 2D is used to create schematic diagrams and to provide the associated reports and MTOs,
and to define and purchase all equipment, instruments, pipe, and so forth, necessary to build
the plant. All of the needed data is stored in databases. These are relational databases which
you can query, add, delete, or edit information to suit your own or your clients needs.
The PDS 2D modules are briefly discussed in the following sections.
1.1.1 Process Flow Diagram (PFD)

Conceptual design of a plant includes
feasibility studies, cost estimates, and process
simulations. Third-party process simulation
packages such as ASPEN or SimSci allow
engineers to perform preliminary calculations
such as chemical equilibriums, reactions, heat
and material balances and/or design pressures
and temperatures. The data produced from
these calculations are transferred to PDS
where a process flow diagram (PFD) is
developed.
1.1.2 Process & Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)

Equipment, instrumentation, and piping schematics
are drawn from process flow data using the Process &
Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID) product.
The P&IDs display the overall process in much greater

detail than the PFD. The P&ID shows all piping,
instrumentation, and controls associated with a
particular process area, as well as all process vessels,
pumps, motors, and so forth.
The P&ID identifies the types of instrumentation and controls required by the process and
assigns tag numbers to each instrument item. The P&ID reflects the overall process control
through either distributive control systems (DCS), programmable logic controllers (PLC), or
stand-alone controller philosophy.
When doing propagation (taking graphic information from the drawing and writing it to the
database), the drawing is checked for conformance to design rules and the drawing
information is loaded into a relational database.
18
________________ What are the 2D modules?
1.1.3 Instruments and Instrument Loops

After the P&ID defines the process controls, the
1. PDS Overview
instruments must be defined with all of the individual
data values. The Instrument Data Manager (IDM) is
the database that maintains an entry for each
instrument in a project.
19
________________
1.2 What are the 3D modules?

PDS 3D is used to create three-dimensional plant models, create equipment models, extract
isometric drawings, and perform design interference checks and equipment clashes. As with
the 2D modules, all of the needed data is stored in relational databases which can be queried
or edited. The PDS 3D modules are briefly discussed in the following sections.
1.2.1 Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP)

Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) allows designers to
model the equipment defined in the P&ID.
Stylistic representations of equipment items are

produced, with or without nozzles, by entering data
from equipment data sheets noting dimensions and
weights. Upon completion, the equipment item is
placed in the 3D model.
Within PD_EQP, designers can create a physical

envelope defining the space occupied by an equipment
item along with space envelopes defining maintenance
and access areas. This process is instrumental for
interference checking later in the modeling process.
1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus (FWP)

Structures must be designed to carry the loads from
piping, equipment, personnel and other factors to the
ground. FrameWorks Plus is used to layout structural
frames, foundations, slabs and walls. Piping designers,
equipment modelers and structural designers, by sharing
reference files, can see the location of each others
objects. The structural engineer referencing other models
can place loads in the 3D model, and apply other
analytical characteristics to use with a third-party analysis
solver. After a design run, the new cross section
properties can be read back into the model to
automatically update all the associated symbolized 2D
drawings.
Other outputs can be obtained from the data model such

as material lists, output to third-party steel detailing
programs, interference envelopes, and graphic and non-
graphic data made available to the rendering and walk-
through products such as DesignReview.
20
1.2.3 Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design)
1. PDS Overview
PD_Design allows designers to create a 3D model of the
piping and in-line instruments defined in the P&ID by
routing the pipelines through space.
When placing the instruments and valves, designers take

into account pipeline flexibility, method of construction,
and ease of access for maintenance and operations.
Designers can route pipe in the 3D model as a centerline
representation; moreover, a 3D shaded model can be
displayed when necessary. The centerline is intelligent and
contains all the information relating to a pipeline, such as
the piping material class, nominal diameter, fluid code,
insulation parameters, temperatures and pressures, and so
forth.
The alphanumeric data required for each pipeline can be

entered interactively or transferred from the P&ID. This
can be done during centerline routing, or it can be
added/revised later.
A pipeline can be connected to a specific nozzle or routed from a point in space. Components
such as valves, instruments and branches can be placed on the pipeline as it is routed. Values
for the alphanumeric datasuch as line sequence number, nominal diameter, material class,
temperatures and pressurescan be set during routing.
Interactive design checks are performed for each component placement. These checks ensure
matching or compatible diameters, pressure ratings, end preparations, and other consistency
criteria. Pipe supports can be modeled giving either a detailed space envelope or a logical
representation of the function of the support, such as an anchor, spring, or guide.
1.2.4 Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Placement of the piping components is specification-driven. The reference data provides the
selection criteria for the piping commodity items found in the piping job specification and
piping commodity libraries delivered with the product. This data is contained in the RDB and
can be used by other projects.
The delivered reference data contains 140 piping materials classes, defining over 100,000
different components for pressure ratings from 125-1500 pounds. It also contains an
extensive set of catalog data including 2200 engineering tables.
Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is specifically designed to define and modify the
reference data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data ensures consistency in the
definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It is used to control and
standardize the PDS 3D modules to reflect company practices and standards.
21
________________
1.2.5 Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Designers use the Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
product to create and/or revise orthographic production
drawings. PD_Draw can be used with other PDS 3D
products to place annotation labels identifying
intelligent items and model coordinates, to plot the
drawings, and to produce reports for drawings and
model data.
1.2.6 PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_Stress)

The stress analyst uses the PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_Stress)
module to generate a neutral file from the 3D piping and equipment
models for stress analysis. PD_Stress interfaces to a number of
commercial packages which accept ASCII format.
1.2.7 Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash)

Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) creates envelope files
for all models in the specified project, design area, or for individual
models which have an envelope builder specific to each discipline
in the Interference Checker/Manager. It also collects envelope data
for the models that have envelope files which were previously
created by one of the other PDS modules. The checker/manager
processes the specified design volume and identifies all of the
interference clashes.
22
It then produces reports which allow the designer to review interferences and review and/or
revise the approval status of the interferences. The software places graphical markers for the
project, produces plots of clashes, and produces an interference report file.
1. PDS Overview
1.2.8 PDS Isometric Interface (PD_ISO,
PD_ISOGEN)
PDS Isometric Interface (PD_ISO,
PD_ISOGEN) allows designers to extract
isometric drawings from the plant model, either
interactively or through a batch process. The
interactive extraction can be used for testing the
interface and verifying a specific pipeline. Batch
generation of isometrics is used for generating
production drawings on a project. With either
function, a bill of materials is automatically
generated and attached to the isometric drawing.
An optional MTO file can be generated which
can be printed or used as input to a material
control system.
1.2.9 Report Manager (PD_Report)

Material take-off reports (MTOs) can be
generated on piping and equipment models
through PD_Report. The MTO process
generates reports by using the graphical data in
the specified models to refer to the Design
Database, Reference Database, Project Database,
and Material Description Libraries for the data
on which to report. This data includes implied
materials, such as bolts, gaskets, and welds, that
are not represented in the model but are
necessary for the specified connectivity.
The Report Manager also maintains the data that defines the format, content, and approval
status of the reports.
23
________________
1.2.10 Project Engineer HVAC (PE-HVAC)

PE-HVAC allows designers to place fittings and
devices while laying out duct routes. You can define
the active parameters for duct characteristics such as
width, depth, shape, material, construction status, and
service.
1.2.11 EE Raceway Modeling

Electrical Engineer Raceway Modeling (EERWAY) is
specification-driven software which allows designers to
extract data from the RDB and create 3D models of cable
trays, conduits, wire ways, underground duct banks, and
cable trenches. These models can be created using the
centerline and/or 3-line component graphics. With these
3D models, you can create interference envelopes and run
interference detection, produce MTOs, and extract raceway
drawings.
24
________________ Design Review Integrator (PD_Review)
1.2.12 Design Review Integrator (PD_Review)
1. PDS Overview
The PD_Review interface provides an intelligent link to Intergraphs DesignReview package.
You can use DesignReview to walk through a PDS modelin full shaded modeand review
the design and alphanumeric data.
Engineering data such as instrument numbers, equipment numbers, line numbers, and line
sizes are available when walking through the model.
Comments are stored in a separate tag file and can be accessed later during the review session.
On subsequent walk-throughs, the original comment can be reviewed along with the
responsible designers actions.
Also with DesignReview, the model can be used to train operations and maintenance
personnel before or after the plant is constructed. DesignReview is not included in the PDS
package and must be purchased separately.
25
________________
1.3 Project Setup

Before work can begin on a project, extensive system setup needs to be completed. The
following outlines the basic flow for initial system setup and project creation. This system
and project setup is usually done by the system manager. Once the project has been set up,
other tasks are done by the designer.
1.3.1 System Setup

PDS can run either stand-alone on a workstation or configured in a server/client relationship.
Due to the size and scope of PDS projects, most companies use a server/client relationship. A
PDS server can act as a database server, a file server, and/or a product server.
File and disk sharing systems such as NFS (Network File System) and DiskShare are used to
access files on the server for processing on the client workstations.
PDS uses relational databases to store informational about virtually all aspects of the project
including:
Project data, such as file names and locations.
Reference data, such as piping commodity descriptions.
Design data, such as temperature and pressure values associated with graphic elements.
The PDS products attach to the relational databases through RIS. RIS supports popular
Relational Database Management Systems, such as Informix, Oracle, and Ingres.
26
________________ Project Setup
1. PDS Overview
1.3.2 2D Setup
The PDS2D product is the base platform loaded on each workstation that will be using PDS
2D application software, such as PFD, P&ID, and IDM.
PDS2D is the interface to the PDS 2D application product line. It can be either loaded with
the client option to access software on a product server or installed locally. PDS2D allows
you to perform project administrative functions such as establish and modify reference data
files, projects, units and drawings.
A 2D project uses a minimum of two database schemas:
A project control database
A "task" (or design) database
The projcreate utility creates the schema information for the installed database. Once the
database files have been created, you can access the 2D environment to create units and
drawings for the project. Units are logical divisions of the schematic world of a plant.
27
________________
1.3.3 3D Setup
The PD Shell product is loaded on each workstation that will be using the PDS 3D products.
Other PDS 3D products can be either loaded on the workstation using the client option or
installed locally.
A 3D project uses three database schemas:
A project control database,
A material/reference database,
A design database.
The 2D and 3D project share a common project control database. The Project
Administrator is used to create the database files, seed files, and project environment files.
A 3D project is divided into design areas by disciplines. Disciplines represent the various 3D
modeling applications (such as Piping, Equipment, and HVAC). A design area represents a
specific portion of the project for a given discipline. Each design area comprises a set of
models that contains the actual design data.
1.3.4 About licensing

PD_LICE is client/server based; one or more central servers can be used to maintain licensing
information for all PDS products in a network. Though the licensing information can be on a
single server, the licenses themselves float, that is, they can be used by any workstation in the
network. Both the client machine and license server must have PD_LICE installed. Any
machine can be a license server; the licensing has little impact on workstation/server
performance.
PDS software is purchased or leased by the license. For example, if you purchased 30
licenses, you are licensed for 30 processes to concurrently access the various PDS software
applications. PD_LICE keeps a running inventory of how many licenses are in use and how
many are available for use. When a PDS application module is started, the application sends a
request to run the software; this request is sent to one or more PDS license servers to obtain a
license to run. If not all licenses are in use, the server grants the license and the application
starts. If all licenses are in use when a batch job requests a license, PD_LICE waits until a
license is released (in other words, a user logs out), and processes the request to run. If all
licenses are in use when an interactive user requests a license, an error message displays
indicating that all PDS licenses are currently in use. You must wait until a license becomes
available.
For more information on this topic, consult the PDS Licensing (PD_LICE) Users Guide
(DEA5071).
28
________________ Project Organization
1.4 Project Organization
1. PDS Overview
Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large, PDS uses the following
organization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily.
A PDS project is comprised of the items that constitute a plant, or the portion of the plant
being modified. The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. Each project
contains all the information required to work in a PDS task.
A 3D project is divided into design areas by discipline. Disciplines represent the various
categories of 3D modeling data such as Piping, Equipment, and Structural. A design area
represents a specific volume or logical area of the project for a given discipline. Design areas
are used to break up the project into smaller areas for interference checking and reporting.
This speeds up processing when only a portion of the project has changed.
Each design area contains a set of models that correspond to a 3D design volume. Although
the illustration above shows only piping areas, each discipline is free to define its areas
independently of all other disciplines. The location of a model and the details of the Design
Volume Coordinate System are specified as seed data in the model definition. The model is
created at full scale.
A model is a MicroStation design file that contains pipelines, equipment items, cable trays,
conduit, structural steel and other items placed by the individual PDS applications such as
Piping Design, Equipment Modeling, Raceway, FrameWorks Plus, respectively. For
example, a piping model may contain only one pipeline or it may contain several pipelines.
This is up to the discretion of the project team to satisfy the needs of a specific project.
Each model may be constructed with respect to a master point of reference, known as the
Plant Monument (PM) or it may be constructed with respect to a local or auxiliary point of
reference, known as the Design Volume Monument (DVM). The use of the DVM in PDS is
analagous to the use of an Auxiliary Coordinate System (ACS) in MicroStation or a secondary
coordinate system in other CAD software systems.
29
________________
For most PDS projects, the PM corresponds to a survey benchmark or some well known
immovable landmark at the plant site from which measurements can be made. The DVM may
also correspond to a benchmark or well known point, but it usually differs from one
corresponding to the BM. For instance, if it is convenient to route piping in an out-building
with respect to the southwest corner of the building, then that corner of the building may be
designated as the DVM so that specifying locations within the building during the design
process may be more convenient. In either case, PDS always knows how to cross-convert
from the two coordinate systems, so both systems may be used interchangeably for the
purposes of routing or for annotation of design documents.
Drawings are produced from the model. Although drawings can be created at different scales,
they all reference the actual model graphics to avoid discrepancies with the model.
Each model represents a unique partition of the design database. This enables you to access
all the data for a single model (independently of the other project data) for the purpose of
creating or modifying information. However, you can also perform interference checking and
create reports based on the combined data from all the models in a project.
The Project Administrator module controls the creation and modification of the PDS 3D
projects. Each project consists of a project control database, design database, piping and
equipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, and raceway), a set of drawings, and
a collection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to one project or shared by
more than one project.
30
________________ Working in Three Dimensions
1.5 Working in Three Dimensions
1. PDS Overview
All PDS models exist in three dimensions. Many design manipulations can be executed in a
2D-like manner, but difficult routing situations and precise device placement require an
understanding of working in a three dimensional environment. Any work done in PDS can be
viewed in 3D from any angle.
PDS drawings are also created in three dimensions. However, all the graphics you draw lie on
a single plane. Think of this plane as a sheet of drawing paper on a drafting board.
Everything you draw on this sheet of paper is contained within one plane only (has only
height and width).
This single drawing plane in which you place 2D graphics can be located anywhere within the
3D graphics system. When you place graphics in a plane other than this one, you create a 3D
file. Therefore, a design file with graphics on only one plane is two dimensional; one with
graphics on more than one plane is three dimensional. The graphic components placed in a
PDS model have designated height, depth, and width, making the design file a 3D file.
31
________________
All graphic elements must be placed in the design cube. The design cube is a volume of
three-dimensional space you can think of as being inside the display terminal (as depicted by
the dashed lines in the figure below).
PDS has the tools to place graphics at any point in the design cube and to look at the design
cube from any angle.
Imagine that a design cube actually does exist within your terminal. If that were so, you
would look into the 3D design cube from the terminal screen in the same way you would look
at a box from one side.
32
________________ Working in Three Dimensions
You normally think of looking at the design cube from one side or direction at a time.
However, you can also look at more than one view, such as the top, front, right, and isometric
views at the same time. These views represent the cube from the corresponding sides.
1. PDS Overview
Notice that the isometric view (also called the rotated view) shows the design cube from an
apparent angle of 30. Actually, the view is rotated 45 in two directions: the cube is
displayed from the top front right.
33
________________
When a three-dimensional component is drawn or placed in the design cube, you are able to
see different sides of the component by looking at different sides of the design cube.
The cube is built around a Cartesian (or Rectangular) coordinate system with the view from
the top such that the y axis is up, the x axis is to the right, and the z axis out (toward you), as
shown below.
Design Cube Showing Cartesian Coordinate System
34
________________ Working Units
1.5.1 Working Units
1. PDS Overview
The working units for a design volume define the extent of the design volume and the
precision of operations. You can revise the working units to be used for any model or
drawing files created in the project.
For interference checking and reference models to work properly, any changes
to the working units should be made for all the 3D models for the project.
Each 3D design file is composed of over 4,000,000,000 units of resolution (UORs). Working
units relate UORs to a measurement unit such as feet or meters and define how these units are
divided. The total units of resolution are divided into master units, sub units, and positional
units (MU:SU:PU) which define the number of addressable points and thereby the precision
of operations. The following outlines the standard working unit definitions for PDS.
35
________________
1.5.2 Recommended Working Units - English
File MU SU PU Area
Models (Piping, Equipment, 1 FT 12 IN 2032 176138 FT
Structural, Raceway, HVAC, Civil,
Architecture, MicroStation)
Drawing 1 FT 12 IN 195072 1834 FT
1.5.3 Recommended Working Units - Metric
File MU SU PU Area
Models 1M 1000 MM 80 53687 M
Drawing 1M 1000 MM 7680 536 M
36
________________ Working Units
1.5.4 Reasoning
1. PDS Overview
The recommended PDS settings for English working units results in 24,384 UORs per foot
(1x12x2032). Dividing this number into the available UORs in the design file yields an area
of coverage of 176,138.75 feet or 33.3 miles.
Working units establish the scale of the data. The actual SU and PU values do not matter as
long as the total UORs per master unit are the same. Therefore the English units can be
converted to metric units to create compatible models.
Dividing the total UORs per foot by the metric conversion factor provides the UORs per
meter.
24384
______ = 80000 UORs per meter
.3048
This value was used to assign the metric values 1:1000:80. Therefore, the values of
1:12:2032 for English units and 1:1000:80 for metric units are compatible.
The recommended English (2032) and metric (80) values allow a file created using the
English system to be viewed and edited in metric mode without scaling or altering data.
The positional units for drawings should be defined so that the drawing has the same
resolution as the model. To maintain the same resolution, the smallest drawing view scale is
used so that the PUs of the drawing file are no less than the maximum factor times the PUs
used in the model.
For English units, the smallest drawing view scale for the delivered drawing seed files is 1/8"
= 1 (12"). This yields a factor of 96 to be applied to the model units to determine the
drawing units.
_12
__ = 96
1/8
2032 x 96 = 195072
For metric units, the factor is 100 (96 x 80 = 7680).
37
________________
1.5.5 3D Coordinate Systems

The 3D coordinate systems used in PDS are Cartesian, or rectangular, coordinate systems,
which define points within the space of the design cube by measuring distances along the x, y,
and z axes.
Rather than use x, y, and z axes, which change according to the view alignment, PDS uses
Easting, Northing, and Elevation axes.
1.5.5.1 Plant Coordinate System

The Plant Coordinate System (PCS) is defined in terms of a plant monument. The plant
monument defines the Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates to be assigned to the
center of the MicroStation design volume. The following form, found in Project Data
Manager, is used to specify the Easting, Northing, and Elevation values of the plant
monument.
This must be done prior to any design file definition.
38
________________ 3D Coordinate Systems
1. PDS Overview
The plant monument is located at the MicroStation point designated as 0, 0, 0. The following
diagram illustrates the Plant Coordinate system when accepting the default values (0, 0, 0) for
the plant monument and when the recommended working units are used:
39
________________
As previously mentioned, the default working units yield an area of coverage of 176,138.75
(33.3 miles, or 53.58 Kilometers). Since the plant monument is always in the center of the
design cube, you can divide 176,135.75 by 2 to determine the extents of the Plant Coordinate
System. The maximum Easting, Northing, and Westing, Southing, Up, or Down coordinate is
88,069 - 4.5"
Entering the Easting value of -5000 is the same as entering Westing 5000;
Northing -20,000 is the same as Southing 20,000.
Do not modify the MicroStation Global Origin for piping or equipment seed
files or models. In general, this is also not necessary for other disciplines seed
or design files. Only if it appears that there will not be enough design plane to
contain all graphics (such as may be the case for large material-conveying
systems spanning several miles) should you even consider a global origin
change. It would always be a good idea to consult a PDS Support contact
before making such a change.
If only positive Easting, Northing, and Westing values are entered, and the default plant
monument values were accepted, you are restricted to using only half of the available design
volume. To work within the contraints of positive Easting and Northing values and still use
the entire design cube, you must modify the Easting and Northing values of the plant
monument. For example, let us assume that the Plant monument is defined to be Easting
88,069 - 4.5", Northing 88,069 - 4.5", and Elevation 0, as shown below.
40
________________ 3D Coordinate Systems
1. PDS Overview
With these settings, the Plant Coordinate System would be defined as follows:
The orientation of the plant coordinate system changes as you look at different views of the
graphic component, but it stays the same in relation to the component.
41
________________
The graphic below shows a plant model with preliminary piping and equipment. The front of
the plant is seen in the front view, the top of the plant in the top view, and so forth. The
coordinate system stays the same in relation to the design. Looking at each view, however,
gives you a different perspective of the coordinate system.
42
________________ Design Volume Coordinate System
1.5.6 Design Volume Coordinate System
1. PDS Overview
The Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) is a second coordinate system (in addition to
the Plant Coordinate System) that can be defined for an individual model. A DVCS is only
required if different models need to have their coordinates referenced from a different point; it
is analogous to the MicroStation Auxiliary Coordinate System.
The DVCS is defined in terms of a Design Volume Monument, which defines the Easting,
Northing, and Elevation coordinates to be assigned to the center of the design volume of the
model.
You can select from two orientations (or use the Other button to select the preferred degree
value) to define the plan view for the design volume, through the Project Data Manager.
North defines North at the top of the screen in a plan view.
North defines North at the right of the screen in a plan view.
Other allows you to define North as a keyed-in degree value.
43
________________
The system uses the global coordinate system to maintain the relationship among the various
reference models attached to the working model.
44
________________ Examples
1.5.7 Examples
1. PDS Overview
The following examples show various ways of modifying the Plant Coordinate System or
Design Volume Coordinate System for various working conditions.
45
________________
46
________________ DVCS Oriented From Plant North
1.5.7.1 DVCS Oriented From Plant North

With values keyed into the Design Volume Corrdinate System Definition form as shown
1. PDS Overview
below, the design volume monument would be located at 350, 325, 0, and it would be rotated
350 degrees (clockwise) from Plant North.
47
________________
If a plant consisted of 3 buildings within a 33.3-mile range, with each building at a different
angle than the other two, then the files might be defined as follows:
Note that, in the example, a unique design volume coordinate system has been
defined for each model.
While placing components in Building 1, the user might prefer to enter values relative to the
SW corner of the building, rather than entering the large values associated with the Plant
Coordinate system. To do this, the project administrator should create a model with a Design
Volume Monument located at the SW corner. In Plant Coordinate System, this coordinate
would be Easting -60,000 (Westing 60,000), Northing -75,000 (Southing 75,000), and
Elevation 0. In the Design Volume coordinate system, the location should be Easting 0,
Northing 0, and Elevation 0.
When a Design Volume Coordinate System has been defined, the user has the choice of
viewing and entering coordinates using the Design Volume Coordinate System or the Plant
Coordinate System.
This capability becomes even more valuable when placing components in buildings such as
Building 2 and Building 3, which are rotated with respect to Plant North. Review the
coordinates for these buildings in the next three screen images.
48
________________ DVCS Oriented From Plant North
Building 1
1. PDS Overview
Notice that the design volume is NOT ROTATED with respect to the PCS.
Building 2
Notice that the design volume is ROTATED 330 DEGREES with respect to
the PCS.
49
________________
Building 3
Notice that the design volume is ROTATED 30 DEGREES with respect to the
PCS.
50
________________ Database Overview
2. Database Overview
PDS uses relational databases to store information about virtually all aspects of the project
including:
Project data, such as file names and locations.
Reference data, such as piping commodity descriptions.
Design data, such as temperature and pressure values associated with graphic elements.
Overview
2. Database
PDS provides a consistent interface for the maintenance of these databases.
All databases you create will be relational databases, meaning that they are based on a
relational data modela relation being a two-dimensional table made up of rows and columns.
Most relational databases have a Structured Query Language (SQL) interface. The PDS
products attach to the relational databases through Intergraph Corporations Relational
Interface System (RIS). RIS is a generic relational database interface that isolates the SQL
interface differences in specific vendors relational database management systems (RDBMSs).
It provides a generic networked access to all databases generated with popular RDBMSs
supported by RIS, including Informix (both Standard Engine and On-line), Oracle, and
Sybase.
51
________________
2.1 PDS and the Relational Interface

System (RIS)
PDS uses RIS to define information in an RDBMS. An RIS schema identifies a unique
database/user combination in the commercial database system.
Users are established for different RDBMSs in different ways; in fact, the concept of a
database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. The various interfaces provided in
PDS let you maintain databases through RIS efficiently, without requiring you to know the
differences between RDBMSs or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement.
RIS works in conjunction with existing databases. You must have RIS implemented on your
network and also have one of the Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMSs)
supported by RIS, such as Informix (SE or On-line), Oracle, or Ingres.
Intergraph Corporation recommends that database creation and manipulations be performed at

the System Manager level. The System Manager should be familiar with the theory and
practice of the Relational Interface System to be successful. See the Relational Interface
System (RIS) Reference Manual for full information.
The database installation program involves significant decisions regarding the size of the
database to be created, the maximum number of users to be supported, the frequency of
automatic backups, and other important issues. Intergraph Corporation recommends that a
system manager who has reviewed the database installation programs install and configure the
databases.
3D RIS Overview
52
________________ Database Overview
Overview
2. Database
2D RIS Overview
The Intergraph product numbers for the relational database products and the corresponding
RIS products are documented in the latest workstation newsletter. All ISS products (nucleus
software) should also be up to date and compatible.
53
________________
2.2 PDS System Configurations

This section describes the configuration options for PDS. PDS can be implemented on a
network consisiting of file servers, database servers, and client nodes.
2.2.1 Client/Server Relationship

PDS is scalable and can be run on a single node or distributed across a number of client and
server nodes. Client nodes can be Intergraph Clipper workstations, or Intel workstations
running Windows NT workstation software.
Server nodes can be Intergraph Clipper servers or multi-processor type Intel servers running
Windows NT server software. Server nodes can be classified into three categories:
Database Server
This is the location of the Relational Databases. All databases will be created and
stored on this machine.
Software Server
This is the location of the PDS application products. By using a software server, you
can load all of the PDS software in a central location and have individual workstations
access the software through the network.
54
________________ PDS System Configurations
File Server
This is the central location used to store the project files such as reference data libraries,
seed files, model files, drawings, and reports.
Depending on system requirements you can designate one server to perform all of these duties
or distribute them among multiple machines.
A client is a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually
a server). In most PDS configurations, the files reside on the server and processing takes
place on the client workstation.
Overview
2. Database
55
________________
2.3 PDS 3D Databases

A 3D project uses three database schemas as outlined in the following illustration.
56
________________ PDS 3D Databases
The 2D and 3D project share a common project control database.
Overview
2. Database
The Project Administrator is used to create the database files, seed files, and project
environment files. A 3D project is divided into design areas by disciplines. Disciplines
represent the various 3D modeling applications (such as Piping, Equipment, and HVAC). A
design area represents a specific volume of the project for a given discipline. Each design
area comprises a set of models which contain the actual design data.
2.3.1 Database Information

A database is a collection of formatted data which conforms to a set of predefined rules. The
PDS Databases are composed of a set of tables (entities) which represent categories of data.
A table is a defined set of columns (attributes) which describe an item, such as the Piping
Commodity Data table.
An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item, such as nominal

diameter or end preparation. Each attribute has a column number in the database table and a
name which describes the piece of information to be stored. The actual information stored in
the database is referred to as the attribute value.
57
________________
2.3.1.1 Attribute Types

The following conventions are used to designate the field type for database attributes.
character(n) alphanumeric field n characters in length
integer double word integer
short short integer
double real (floating point) value
standard note nnnn Standard Note Type for code-listed attribute
2.3.1.2 Code-Listed Attributes

A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value must be defined using one of the selections
from a particular code list in the Standard Note Library. In the database definition files,
attributes which are code-listed are identified by a standard note number at the end of the line
following the field type description. For example, the line
6. fluid_code , character(6) , standard note 125
indicates that fluid_code is defined in terms of code list numbers belonging to Standard Note
125, Fluid Code/Connector Type. A possible entry for this attribute would be 197 for
chlorine gas (GCL).
CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999)
1 = [Blank]
11 = A [Air]
14 = AC [Combustion air]
17 = AE [Aeration air]
20 = AI [Instrument air]
:
:
191 = G [Gas]
194 = GCD [Carbon dioxide gas]
197 = GCL [Chlorine gas]
198 = GCN [Chlorination gas]
200 = GF [Fuel gas]
203 = GG [Flue gas]
206 = GH [Hydrogen gas]
209 = GHS [Hydrogen sulphide gas]
58
________________ Database Definition Files
2.4 Database Definition Files

This section lists the delivered database definition (ddl) files for Workstation PDS. These
files are delivered with the PD_Shell product in the directory win32app\ingr\pdshell\ddl.
When you create a project, the system copies these files to the project directory and uses them
to create the database tables and columns.
2.4.1 Project Control Database

# Project Control Database
Overview
2. Database
# Default Relational Database Definition
# The user must not revise this database definition other than to change
# column names.
###################################################
# Project Description Data
table number = 101 , number of columns = 6
1 , system_unique_no , integer
2 , project_no , character(15)
3 , project_name , character(40)
4 , job_no , character(40)
5 , company_name , character(40)
6 , plant_name , character(40)
###################################################
# Reference Database Management Data
table number = 102, number of columns = 9
1 , type_of_rdb_data , short
2 , approval_status , short
3 , rdb_file_spec , character(14)
4 , path_name , character(36)
5 , network_address , character(26)
6 , lock_owner , character(10)
7 , lock_status , short
8 , lock_date , integer
9 , revision_date , integer
###################################################
# Project Control Data
59
________________
1 , product_version_no , short
2 , report_path , character(36)
3 , report_node , character(26)
4 , report_format_path , character(36)
5 , report_format_node , character(26)
6 , report_filter_path , character(36)
7 , report_filter_node , character(26)
8 , piping_eden_path , character(36)
9 , piping_eden_node , character(26)
10, eden_table_path , character(36)
11, eden_table_node , character(26)
12, piping_spec_path , character(36)
13, piping_spec_node , character(26)
14, assembly_path , character(36)
15, assembly_node , character(26)
16, model_builder_path , character(36)
17, model_builder_node , character(26)
18, design_review_path , character(36)
19, design_review_node , character(26)
20, std_note_lib_path , character(36)
21, std_note_lib_node , character(26)
22, eqp_eden_path , character(36)
23, eqp_eden_node , character(26)
24, tdf_table_path , character(36)
25, tdf_table_node , character(26)
26, clash_report_path , character(36)
27, clash_report_node , character(26)
28, clash_plot_path , character(36)
29, clash_plot_node , character(26)
30, mdl_status_low_dr , short , standard note 1605
31, mdl_status_high_dr , short , standard note 1605
32, mdl_status_low_ic , short , standard note 1605
33, mdl_status_high_ic , short , standard note 1605
34, area_owner_opt_ic , short
35, eqp_insul_opt_ic , short
36, eqp_con_tol_opt_ic , short
37, clash_rpt_index_no , integer
38, report_search_path , character(36)
39, report_search_node , character(26)
###################################################
# Project Archival Management Data
1 , archival_index_no , integer
2 , archival_number , character(24)
3 , archival_descript , character(40)
4 , archival_file_spec , character(14)
7 , month_map , integer
8 , day_of_week_map , integer
9 , day_map , integer
10, time_of_day , integer
###################################################
# Model Management Data
60
# Engineering Discipline Data
1 , discipline_indx_no , short
2 , discipline_name , character(20)
3 , intra_disc_ifc_flg , short
4 , discipline_mtrx_a, integer
5 , discipline_mtrx_b, integer
# Design Area Data
Overview
2. Database
2 , area_index_no , short
3 , area_name , character(10)
4 , area_description , character(40)
5 , volume_low_x , integer
6 , volume_low_y , integer
7 , volume_low_z , integer
8 , volume_high_x , integer
9 , volume_high_y , integer
10, volume_high_z , integer
11, interference_mode , short
12, area_lock_owner , character(10)
13, area_lock_status , short
14, area_lock_date , integer
15, clash_rpt_index_no , integer
# Model Data
1 , model_index_no , integer , index 1

4 , partition_no , short
5 , model_no , character(10)
6 , model_description , character(40)
7 , model_file_spec , character(14)
10, lock_owner , character(10)
11, lock_status , short
12, lock_date , integer
13, verification_date , integer
14, revision_date , integer
15, responsible_disc , short
16, model_type , short
17, model_status , short , standard note 1605
# Piping Model Data
1 , partition_no , short
2 , max_segment_number , integer
3 , max_piping_number , integer
61
________________
4 , max_pipe_number , integer
5 , max_instr_number , integer
6 , max_support_number , integer
# Model Setup Data
2 , default_path_name , character(36)
3 , default_node , character(26)
4 , ref_mdl_symbology , short
5 , symbology_display , short
###################################################
# Structural Management Data
# Structural Sub-Project Control Data
1 , sub_project_ndx_no , short
2 , sub_project_no , character(15)
3 , sub_project_name , character(40)
4 , sub_project_path , character(36)
5 , sub_project_node , character(26)
6 , sub_project_mount , character(50)
# Structural Design Area Per Sub-Project Data
2 , sub_project_ndx_no , short
###################################################
# Inspection Iso Data
1 , inspection_iso_id , character(24)
2 , inspection_status , short
3 , max_inspection_key , short
###################################################
###################################################
# Drawing Management Data
# Drawing Data
62
1 , dwg_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , drawing_no , character(24) , index 2
3 , drawing_title , character(40)
4 , default_scale , character(16)
5 , approval_initials , character(4)
6 , approval_date , integer
7 , approval_status , short , standard note 35
8 , completion_status , short
9 , drawing_size , short , standard note 1202
10, drawing_type , short , standard note 2000 , index 3
11, last_revision_no , character(2)
12, drawing_file_spec , character(14)
13, path_name , character(36)
14, network_address , character(26)
Overview
2. Database
19, last_rev_index_no , short
20, release_revision , character(2)
21, release_date , integer
22, checking_status , short , standard note 1610
23, standard_note_no_a , short , standard note 499
24, standard_note_no_b , short , standard note 499
# Drawing View Data
1 , dwg_view_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , dwg_view_no , character(6) , index 2
3 , dwg_view_name , character(40)
4 , dwg_view_scale , character(16)
5 , dwg_index_no , integer
6 , saved_view_name , character(6)
7 , viewing_direction , short , standard note 1620
8 , composition_status , short , standard note 1630
9 , dwg_view_x_low , double
10, dwg_view_y_low , double
11, dwg_view_z_low , double
12, dwg_view_x_high , double
13, dwg_view_y_high , double
14, dwg_view_z_high , double
15, vhl_category_index , short
16, drawing_view_type , short
# Drawing View Reference Model Data
1 , dwg_view_index_no , integer
2 , model_index_no , integer
# Composite Drawing View Data
63
________________
1 , comp_dwg_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , comp_dwg_view_no , character(6)
3 , comp_dwg_view_name , character(40)
4 , comp_dwg_v_scale , character(16)
6 , dwg_view_index_a , integer
7 , dwg_view_index_b , integer
8 , dwg_view_index_c , integer
9 , dwg_view_index_d , integer
10, dwg_view_index_e , integer
11, dwg_view_index_f , integer
12, dwg_view_index_g , integer
13, dwg_view_index_h , integer
14, dwg_view_index_i , integer
15, dwg_view_index_j , integer
# Drawing Revision Data
2 , revision_index_no , short
3 , revision_no , character(2)
5 , revision_by , character(4)
6 , checked_by , character(4)
7 , rev_description , character(40)
# Drawing Setup Data
1 , drawing_type , short , standard note 2000

3 , drawing_scale , character(16)
6 , discipline_mask , short
7 , alternate_seed_opt , short
8 , cell_file_spec , character(14)
9 , cell_path_name , character(36)
10, cell_net_address , character(26)
11, plot_catgy_mask_a , integer
12, plot_catgy_mask_b , integer
13, label_mask_a , integer
14, label_mask_b , integer
15, label_mask_c , integer
16, label_mask_d , integer
# Reference Model Display Category Setup Data

3 , category_mask_a , integer
4 , category_mask_b , integer
5 , category_mask_c , integer
6 , category_mask_d , integer
7 , vhl_category_msk_a , integer
64
8 , vhl_category_msk_b , integer
9 , vhl_category_msk_c , integer
10, vhl_category_msk_d , integer
11, vhl_ref_symbology , short
12, vhl_symbology , short
# Plotting Default Data
1 , iplot_index_no , integer
2 , iplot_number , character(24)
3 , iplot_description , character(40)
4 , iplot_file_spec , character(14)
Overview
2. Database
###################################################
# Interference Management Data
# Clash Management Data
1 , system_unique_no , integer , index 1

4 , unique_sequence_no , integer
5 , completion_date , integer
6 , control_user_no , short
7 , env_creation_date , integer
8 , clash_check_option , short , standard note 1208
9 , volume_filter_opt , short , standard note 1209
10, volume_low_x , integer
11, volume_low_y , integer
12, volume_low_z , integer
13, volume_high_x , integer
14, volume_high_y , integer
15, volume_high_z , integer
# Clash Data Per Project
1 , unique_clash_id , integer , index 1

2 , if_approval_status , short , standard note 1203
3 , comp_a_unique_id , integer
4 , comp_b_unique_id , integer
5 , model_index_no_a , integer
6 , model_index_no_b , integer
7 , discipline_index_a , short
8 , discipline_index_b , short
9 , recent_clash_type , short , standard note 1204
10, recent_plot_date , integer
11, recent_review_date , integer , index 2
12, recent_sequence_no , integer
65
________________
13, area_index_no , short

14, action_discipline , short
15, recent_seq_no_b , integer
16, area_index_no_b , short
# Clash Data Per Job

3 , unique_sequence_no , integer
4 , clash_type , short , standard note 1204
5 , comp_a_range_x_lo , integer
6 , comp_a_range_y_lo , integer
7 , comp_a_range_z_lo , integer
8 , comp_a_range_x_hi , integer
9 , comp_a_range_y_hi , integer
10, comp_a_range_z_hi , integer
11, comp_b_range_x_lo , integer
12, comp_b_range_y_lo , integer
13, comp_b_range_z_lo , integer
14, comp_b_range_x_hi , integer
15, comp_b_range_y_hi , integer
16, comp_b_range_z_hi , integer
# Component Clash Data Per Project
1 , unique_comp_id , integer , index 1

2 , comp_table_number , short
3 , comp_row_number , integer
5 , primary_descript , character(20)
6 , secondary_descript , character(40)
7 , comp_model_status , short
# Clash Review History Information

3 , review_date , integer
4 , review_user_no , short
5 , responsib_user_no , short
6 , action , short , standard note 1205
7 , review_comment , character(100)
8 , approval_method , short , standard note 1207
# Clash Plot History Information

2 , unique_clash_id , integer
3 , plot_date , integer
66
4 , plot_user_no , short
###################################################
# Report Management Data
# Report Data
1 , report_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , report_no , character(24) , index 2
3 , report_title , character(40)
Overview
2. Database
7 , last_revision_no , character(2)
8 , report_file_spec , character(14)
15, format_index_no , integer
16, filter_index_no , integer
18, report_source , short , standard note 1310
19, report_type , short , standard note 1312
20, search_index_no , integer
# Report Format Data
1 , format_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , format_number , character(24)
3 , format_description , character(40)
4 , format_file_spec , character(14)
11, rpt_format_source , short , standard note 1310
# Report Descrimination Data
1 , filter_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , filter_number , character(24)
3 , filter_description , character(40)
4 , filter_file_spec , character(14)
67
________________
11, rpt_filter_source , short , standard note 1310
# Report Revision Data
1 , report_index_no , integer
# Report Search Criteria Data
1 , search_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , search_number , character(24)
3 , search_description , character(40)
4 , search_file_spec , character(14)
11, rpt_search_source , short , standard note 1310
###################################################
# DesignReview Management Data
1 , review_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , review_no , character(24)
3 , review_title , character(40)
4 , review_type , short , standard note 1410
5 , control_file_spec , character(14)
6 , control_path_name , character(36)
7 , control_node , character(26)
8 , control_lock_owner , character(10)
9 , control_lock_stat , short
10, control_lock_date , integer
11, tag_file_spec , character(14)
12, tag_path_name , character(36)
13, tag_node , character(26)
14, tag_lock_owner , character(10)
15, tag_lock_status , short
16, tag_lock_date , integer
17, session_rev_date , integer
68
18, label_rev_date , integer

19, label_file_spec , character(14)
20, label_path_name , character(36)
21, label_net_address , character(26)
22, month_map , integer
23, day_of_week_map , integer
24, day_map , integer
25, time_of_day , integer
###################################################
# Package/Release Management Data
Overview
2. Database
# Package Data
1 , package_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , package_no , character(24)
3 , package_title , character(40)
4 , release_revision , character(2)
5 , release_date , integer
# Document Data
1 , document_index_no , integer
2 , package_index_no , integer
3 , document_source , short , standard note 1710
4 , document_type , short , standard note 1720
###################################################
# Isometric Drawing Management Data
# Isometric Files Data
1 , isofile_indx_no , integer
2 , isodflt_indx_no , integer
3 , isofile_type , short
4 , isofile_spec , character(14)
7 , iso_description , character(40)
# Project Options Data
69
________________
1 , isoproj_indx_no , integer , index 1

2 , isoproj_task_opt , short
3 , isoproj_name_opt , short
4 , isoproj_dwg_opt , short
6 , reserved_1 , character(26)
9 , batch_options , character(20)
10, isoproj_name_label , short
11, isoproj_dwg_label , short
12, sub_directory_opt , short
# Defaults Set Data
2 , isodflt_tag , character(12) , index 1
3 , isodflt_descr , character(40)
4 , isodflt_rev_date , integer
# Isometric Design Area Definition Data
1 , iso_area_indx_no , integer
2 , area_indx_no1 , short , index 1
3 , area_indx_no2 , short
8 , selection_mode , short
9 , iso_area_name , character(10)
10, iso_area_desc , character(40)
11, user_data_indx_no , integer
12, isodflt_indx_no , integer
13, cont_indx_no1 , short
# Isometric User Data
1 , user_data_indx_no , integer
2 , type_of_user_data , short
3 , user_data_1 , character(40)
70
10, user_data_8 , character(40)
# Isometric Drawing Extraction Data
1 , drawing_indx_no , integer
2 , iso_area_indx_no , integer , index 1
3 , lineid_1 , character(16) , index 2
Overview
2. Database
4 , lineid_2 , character(16)
5 , lineid_3 , character(16)
6 , number_of_sections , short
7 , drawing_number , character(20)
8 , batch_ref_no , character(12)
9 , iso_dgn_name , character(10)
10, model_status_code , character(2)
11, model_revised_date , integer
12, lst_extraction_date, integer
13, tot_no_extractions , short
14, no_sheets_extract , short
15, last_mto_date , integer
16, mto_to_mtl_control , integer
17, no_of_revisions , short
18, user_data_indx_no , integer
19, iso_type , short , index 3
# Isometric Drawing Revision Information
1 , draw_rev_indx_no , integer
2 , draw_sht_indx_no , integer , index 1
3 , type_of_revision , short , index 2
4 , revision_number , short , index 3
5 , generated_by , character(3)
7 , approved_by , character(3)
8 , extraction_date , integer
9 , extraction_no , short
10, sheets_extracted , short
11, rev_description , character(40)
12, isodflt_indx_no , integer
# Isometric Last Used Occurrence Data
1 , table_no , integer
2 , last_used , integer
# Isometric Sheet Extraction Data
71
________________
1 , sheet_indx_no , integer
2 , drawing_indx_no , integer , index 1
3 , sheet_no , integer , index 2
4 , last_extract_date , integer
5 , tot_no_extractions , integer
6 , last_mto_date , integer
7 , no_of_revisions , integer
# Isometric Drawing Re-Extraction Data
1 , drawing_indx_no , integer , index 1

2 , section_no , short , index 2
3 , start_traversal_x , integer
4 , start_traversal_y , integer
5 , start_traversal_z , integer
6 , start_entity , short
7 , start_comp_occ , integer
8 , start_seg_occ , integer
72
________________ Design Database
2.4.2 Design Database

# Piping Design Database
# column names. Adding user-defined columns and changing lengths of
# character data, where valid, must be performed in the Project Administrator
# when the project is created.
# Piping Segment Data
Overview
2. Database

2 , line_number_label , character(40)
3 , line_id , character(24)
4 , unit_number , character(12)
5 , unit_code , character(3)
6 , module_no , character(16)
7 , package_system_no , character(12)
8 , train_number , character(2)
9 , fluid_code , short , standard note 125
10 , line_sequence_no , character(16)
11 , nominal_piping_dia , short
12 , piping_mater_class , character(16)
13 , gasket_separation , character(8)
14 , insulation_purpose , short , standard note 220
15 , insulation_thick , double
16 , insulation_density , double , standard note 1074 (units)
17 , heat_tracing_reqmt , short , standard note 200
18 , heat_tracing_media , short , standard note 210
19 , heat_tracing_temp , double
20 , construction_stat , short , standard note 130
21 , hold_status , short , standard note 50
23 , schedule_override , character(8) , standard note 332
24 , nor_oper_pres , double
25 , nor_oper_temp , double
26 , alt_oper_pres , double
27 , alt_oper_temp , double
28 , nor_dgn_pres , double
29 , nor_dgn_temp , double
30 , alt_dgn_pres , double
31 , alt_dgn_temp , double
32 , steam_outlet_temp , double
33 , mater_of_construct , character(6)
34 , safety_class , short , standard note 340
35 , design_standard , short , standard note 570
36 , design_area_number , character(10)
37 , design_resp , short , standard note 160
38 , construction_resp , short , standard note 160
39 , supply_resp , short , standard note 160
40 , coating_reqmts , short , standard note 190
41 , cleaning_reqmts , short , standard note 230
42 , fluid_category , character(4)
43 , nor_op_pres_units , short , standard note 1064
73
________________
44 , nor_op_temp_units , short , standard note 1056

45 , alt_op_pres_units , short , standard note 1064
46 , alt_op_temp_units , short , standard note 1056
47 , nor_dgn_pres_units , short , standard note 1064
48 , nor_dgn_temp_units , short , standard note 1056
49 , alt_dgn_pres_units , short , standard note 1064
50 , alt_dgn_temp_units , short , standard note 1056
51 , steam_temp_units , short , standard note 1056
52 , stress_system_no , character(12)
53 , stress_reqmts , short , standard note 360
54 , hyd_system_no , character(12)
55 , hyd_reqmts , short , standard note 360
56 , specific_gravity_a , double
57 , specific_gravity_b , double
58 , specific_gravity_c , double
59 , viscosity , double
60 , density , double
61 , spec_heat_ratio , double
62 , sonic_velocity , double
63 , surface_roughness , double
64 , test_system_no , character(6)
65 , test_fluid , short , standard note 125
66 , test_pressure , double
67 , PID_id_part_a , character(4)
68 , PID_id_part_b , character(4)
69 , end_1_nozzle_id , integer
70 , end_2_nozzle_id , integer
71 , alpha_descript_id , character(12)
72 , standard_note_no , short , standard note 499
73 , pid_index_no , integer
74 , color_code , character(8)
75 , inspection_iso_id , character(24)
76 , index_to_pi_dwg , integer
# Piping Component Data

2 , piping_comp_no , character(20)
3 , commodity_name , character(6)
4 , model_code , character(6)
5 , option_code , short , standard note 400
6 , maximum_temp , double
7 , sched_thick_basis , character(8) , standard note 332
8 , commodity_code , character(16)
9 , MTO_requirements , short , standard note 365
10 , fabrication_cat , short , standard note 180
11 , source_of_data , short , standard note 420
12 , PDS_sort_code , character(6)
13 , physical_data_id , character(8)
14 , geometric_standard , short , standard note 575
15 , weight_code , short , standard note 578
16 , table_suffix_green , short , standard note 576
17 , table_suffix_red , short , standard note 577
18 , materials_grade , short , standard note 145
19 , bend_radius , double
20 , bend_angle , double
21 , face_to_face_dim , double
22 , dimension_a , double
23 , dimension_b , double
74
24 , dimension_c , double
25 , surface_area , double , standard note 1010 (units)
26 , empty_weight , double , standard note 1028 (units)
27 , water_weight , double , standard note 1028 (units)
28 , operator_weight , double
29 , operator_sym_name , character(6)
30 , chain_operator_no , short
31 , opening_action , short , standard note 390
37 , iso_dwg_index_no , integer
38 , isometric_sheet_no , character(2)
39 , piece_mark_no , character(10)
Overview
2. Database
41 , stress_node_no , short
42 , stress_intens_fact , double
43 , head_loss_factor , double
44 , piping_assembly , character(12)
45 , component_group_no , short
46 , remarks , character(50)
47 , standard_note_no_a , short , standard note 499
48 , standard_note_no_b , short , standard note 499
49 , cp_1_nom_pipe_diam , short
50 , cp_1_outside_diam , double
51 , cp_1_end_prep , short , standard note 330
52 , cp_1_sch_thk , character(8) , standard note 332
53 , cp_1_rating , character(8)
54 , cp_1_face_to_ctr , double
55 , cp_1_weld_no , character(8)
56 , cp_1_weld_type , short , standard note 1100 / 400 (bolt option)
57 , cp_1_gasket_gap , double
58 , cp_1_gasket_option , short , standard note 400
59 , cp_1_stress_node , short
60 , cp_1_stress_factor , double
61 , cp_1_head_loss , double
75
________________
100, cp_4_head_loss , double
101, cp_5_nom_pipe_diam , short

102, cp_5_outside_diam , double
103, cp_5_end_prep , short , standard note 330
104, cp_5_sch_thk , character(8) , standard note 332
105, cp_5_rating , character(8)
106, cp_5_face_to_ctr , double
107, cp_5_weld_no , character(8)
108, cp_5_weld_type , short , standard note 1100 / 400 (bolt option)
109, cp_5_gasket_gap , double
110, cp_5_gasket_option , short , standard note 400
111, cp_5_stress_node , short
112, cp_5_stress_factor , double
114, unique_name , character(12)

115, vlv_operator_dim_a , double
116, vlv_operator_dim_b , double
117, vlv_operator_dim_c , double
118, vlv_operator_dim_d , double
119, last_placed_date , integer

120, generic_comp_no , character(20)
121, inspection_key , short
122, cp_1_inspect_key , short
# Piping/Tubing Data

8 , outside_diameter , double
76
9 , schedule_thickness , character(8) , standard note 332

11 , rating , character(8)
22 , pipe_length , double
Overview
2. Database
26 , cold_spring_length , double
41 , end_1_end_prep , short , standard note 330

42 , end_1_weld_no , character(8)
43 , end_1_weld_type , short , standard note 1100 / 400 (bolt option)
44 , end_1_gasket_gap , double
45 , end_1_gasket_opt , short , standard note 400
46 , end_1_stress_node , short
47 , end_1_stres_int , double
48 , end_1_head_loss , double
49 , end_2_end_prep , short , standard note 330

50 , end_2_weld_no , character(8)
51 , end_2_weld_type , short , standard note 1100 / 400 (bolt option)
52 , end_2_gasket_gap , double
53 , end_2_gasket_opt , short , standard note 400
54 , end_2_stress_node , short
55 , end_2_stres_int , double
56 , end_2_head_loss , double
57 , unique_name , character(12)
58 , last_placed_date , integer
59 , inspection_key , short
60 , end_1_inspect_key , short
61 , end_2_inspect_key , short
# Instrument Component Data
77
________________
2 , instrument_comp_no , character(20)
10 , physical_data_id , character(8)
16 , face_to_face_dim , double
23 , operator_weight , double , standard note 1028 (units)
24 , operator_type , double
25 , operator_sym_name , character(6)
26 , chain_operator_no , short
27 , chain_length , double
28 , opening_action , short , standard note 390
31 , design_resp , short , standard note 160
32 , construction_resp , short , standard note 160
37 , insulation_thick , double
38 , insulation_density , double , standard note 1074 (units)
39 , cleaning_reqmts , short , standard note 230
40 , safety_class , short , standard note 340
41 , module_no , character(16)
42 , package_system_no , character(12)
47 , stress_node_no , short
48 , stress_intens_fact , double
49 , head_loss_factor , double
78
Overview
2. Database
107, cp_5_nom_pipe_diam , short

108, cp_5_outside_diam , double
109, cp_5_end_prep , short , standard note 330
110, cp_5_sch_thk , character(8) , standard note 332
111, cp_5_rating , character(8)
112, cp_5_face_to_ctr , double
79
________________
120, unique_name , character(12)

121, bend_angle , double
122, vlv_operator_dim_a , double
123, vlv_operator_dim_b , double
124, vlv_operator_dim_c , double
125, vlv_operator_dim_d , double
126, last_placed_date , integer

127, generic_comp_no , character(20)
128, inspection_key , short
# Pipe Support Data

2 , pipe_support_no , character(20)
3 , model_code_phy , character(6)
4 , model_code_log , character(6)
5 , iso_support_type_a , short , standard note 380
6 , iso_support_type_b , short , standard note 380
7 , iso_support_type_c , short , standard note 380
8 , iso_support_type_d , short , standard note 380
9 , details_for_shop , character(50)
10 , details_for_field , character(50)
11 , fabrication_orient , character(20)
15 , weight , double , standard note 1028 (units)
18 , standard_note_no , short , standard note 499
23 , isometric_dim_a , double
24 , isometric_dim_b , double
25 , isometric_dim_c , double
26 , isometric_dim_d , double
27 , isometric_dim_e , double
28 , trans_rigidity_x , double
29 , trans_rigidity_y , double
30 , trans_rigidity_z , double
31 , rot_rigidity_x , double
32 , rot_rigidity_y , double
33 , rot_rigidity_z , double
34 , spring_gap_length , double
35 , sping_gap_direct , short
36 , number_of_springs , short
37 , last_placed_date , integer
38 , inspection_key , short
# equip_group
80
1 , equip_indx_no , integer
2 , equip_no , character(30)
3 , equip_descr_1 , character(40)
4 , equip_descr_2 , character(40)
5 , tutorial_no , character(6)
6 , equip_class , character(2)
7 , dry_weight , double
8 , oper_weight_1 , double
9 , oper_weight_2 , double
10 , insulation_thk , double
12 , equipment_division , short , standard note 69
# equip_nozzle
Overview
2. Database
1 , nozzle_indx_no , integer
2 , nozzle_no , character(10)
6 , preparation , short , standard note 330
8 , unit_no , character(12)
9 , fluid_code , short , standard note 125
10 , unit_code , character(2)
11 , line_sequence_no , character(6)
15 , insulation_thk , double
16 , table_suffix , short , standard note 576
17 , service , character(20)
18 , schedule_thickness , character(8)
19 , nor_therm_growth_X , double
20 , nor_therm_growth_Y , double
21 , nor_therm_growth_Z , double
22 , alt_therm_growth_X , double
23 , alt_therm_growth_Y , double
24 , alt_therm_growth_Z , double
# equip_nozzle_extended
1 , nozzle_indx_no , integer
3 , parm_indx_no , integer
4 , parm_noz_no , short
5 , face_of_flange_x , double
6 , face_of_flange_y , double
7 , face_of_flange_z , double
8 , face_flange_pri_1 , double
11 , face_flange_sec_1 , double
14 , face_flange_nor_1 , double
81
________________
17 , nozzle_type , short
18 , nozzle_length_1 , double
19 , nozzle_length_2 , double
20 , nozzle_radius , double
21 , reference_item , character(11)
22 , ref_loc_x , double
23 , ref_loc_y , double
24 , ref_loc_z , double
25 , ref_loc_pri_1 , double
28 , ref_loc_sec_1 , double
31 , ref_loc_nor_1 , double
34 , orientation_1 , double
38 , dimension_1 , double
44 , c_face_of_flange_x , character(41)
45 , c_face_of_flange_y , character(41)
46 , c_face_of_flange_z , character(41)
47 , c_face_flange_pri , character(31)
48 , c_face_flange_sec , character(31)
49 , c_face_flange_nor , character(31)
50 , c_nozzle_length_1 , character(31)
51 , c_nozzle_length_2 , character(31)
52 , c_nozzle_radius , character(31)
53 , c_ref_loc_x , character(41)
54 , c_ref_loc_y , character(41)
55 , c_ref_loc_z , character(41)
56 , c_ref_loc_pri , character(31)
57 , c_ref_loc_sec , character(31)
58 , c_ref_loc_nor , character(31)
59 , c_orientation_1 , character(11)
63 , c_dimension_1 , character(31)
#equip_datum_point
3 , point_type , short
82
________________Design Database
4 , point_indx_no , short
5 , loc_x , double
6 , loc_y , double
7 , loc_z , double
8 , loc_pri_1 , double
11 , loc_sec_1 , double
14 , loc_nor_1 , double
17 , c_loc_x , character(41)
18 , c_loc_y , character(41)
19 , c_loc_z , character(41)
Overview
2. Database
20 , c_loc_pri , character(31)
21 , c_loc_sec , character(31)
22 , c_loc_nor , character(31)
# equip_primitive
2 , prim_name , character(20)
3 , place_pnt_no , short
4 , place_by_x , double
5 , place_by_y , double
6 , place_by_z , double
7 , place_by_pri_1 , double
10 , place_by_sec_1 , double
13 , place_by_nor_1 , double
16 , category_type , short
20 , dimension_d , double
21 , dimension_e , double
22 , c_place_by_x , character(41)
23 , c_place_by_y , character(41)
24 , c_place_by_z , character(41)
25 , c_place_by_pri , character(31)
26 , c_place_by_sec , character(31)
27 , c_place_by_nor , character(31)
28 , c_dimension_a , character(31)
29 , c_dimension_b , character(31)
30 , c_dimension_c , character(31)
31 , c_dimension_d , character(31)
32 , c_dimension_e , character(31)
# equip_primitive_usr_proj_shape
83
________________
2 , prim_name , character(20)
3 , place_point_no , short
13 , category_type , short
14 , number_vertices , short
15 , projection , double
16 , vertex_1_x , double
17 , vertex_1_y , double
59 , c_projection , character(31)
60 , c_vertex_1_x , character(31)
61 , c_vertex_1_y , character(31)
84
________________Design Database
Overview
2. Database
# equip_parametric
3 , symbol_name , character(10)
4 , place_pnt_no , short
5 , place_by_x , double
6 , place_by_y , double
7 , place_by_z , double
17 , c_place_by_x , character(41)
18 , c_place_by_y , character(41)
19 , c_place_by_z , character(41)
85
________________
# equip_parametric_extended
2 , form_indx_no , short
3 , form_name , character(10)
4 , form_fld , short
5 , data_type , short
6 , dimension_no , short
7 , nozzle_fld , short
8 , fld_attribute , short
9 , fld_default , character(21)
10 , fld_name , character(13)
11 , value_real , double
12 , value_char , character(41)
86
________________ Reference Database
2.4.3 Reference Database

# Specification/Material Reference Database
# column names.
# Piping Materials Class Data
Overview
2. Database
4 , version_no , character(2)
5 , revision_date , character(10)
6 , fluid_code , character(6) , standard note 125
8 , corrosion_allow , double
9 , mat_description , short , standard note 148
10, service_lim_table , character(6)
11, diameter_table , character(6)
12, thickness_table , character(6)
13, materials_table , character(6)
14, thickness_equation , character(6)
15, branch_table , character(6)
16, tap_data_table , character(6)
17, vent_drain_macro , character(6)
18, gasket_separation , character(8)
21, revision_mngt_date , integer
22, bend_deflect_table , character(6)
23, pipe_length_table , character(6)
# Piping Commodity Specification Data
2 , piping_mater_class , character(16) , index 1
6 , gcp_from_nom_diam , short
7 , gcp_to_nom_diam , short
8 , gcp_end_prep , short , standard note 330
9 , gcp_rating , character(8)
10, gcp_sch_thk , character(8)
11, gcp_table_suffix , short , standard note 576
12, rcp_from_nom_diam , short
13, rcp_to_nom_diam , short
14, rcp_end_prep , short , standard note 330
15, rcp_rating , character(8)
16, rcp_sch_thk , character(8)
87
________________
17, rcp_table_suffix , short , standard note 577

18, commodity_code , character(16)
19, model_code , character(6)
20, PDS_sort_code , character(6)
21, modifier , double
22, geometric_standard , short , standard note 575
23, weight_code , short , standard note 578
24, fabrication_cat , short , standard note 180
25, materials_grade , short , standard note 145
28, input_form_type , short , standard note 990
# Piping Specialty Specification Data
9 , gcp_sch_thk , character(8)
17, physical_data_id , character(8)
# Instrument Component Specification Data
88
________________ Reference Database

Overview
2. Database
# Tap Properties Data
2 , tap_table_name , character(6)
5 , end_preparation , short , standard note 330
7 , sched_thick , character(8)
8 , tap_material_code , character(10)
# Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data
2 , sys_commodity_code , character(16) , index 1
3 , gcp_nom_diam , short
4 , rcp_nom_diam , short
6 , rcp_sch_thk , character(8)
8 , weld_weight , double
9 , unit_price , double
10, manhours , double
# Piping Commodity Implied Material Data
2 , sys_commodity_code , character(16) , index 1
5 , rcp_from_nom_diam , short
6 , rcp_to_nom_diam , short
8 , quantity , double
9 , fabrication_cat , short
10, standard_note_no , short
89
________________
# Reference Database Revision Management Data
1 , specialty_rev_date , integer
2 , instr_rev_date , integer
3 , tap_data_rev_date , integer
4 , size_data_rev_date , integer
5 , implied_rev_date , integer
6 , cmp_insul_rev_date , integer
7 , flg_insul_rev_data , integer
8 , con_tol_excl_data , integer
# Component Insulation Exclusion Data
4 , gcp_npd_from , short
5 , gcp_npd_to , short
6 , rcp_npd_from , short
7 , rcp_npd_to , short
8 , heat_tracing_from , short , standard note 200
9 , heat_tracing_to , short , standard note 200
10, insul_purpose_from , short , standard note 220
11, insul_purpose_to , short , standard note 220
12, nor_oper_temp_from , double
13, nor_oper_temp_to , double
# Flange Insulation Exclusion Data
2 , bolted_npd_from , short
3 , bolted_npd_to , short
4 , heat_tracing_from , short , standard note 200
5 , heat_tracing_to , short , standard note 200
6 , insul_purpose_from , short , standard note 220
7 , insul_purpose_to , short , standard note 220
8 , nor_oper_temp_from , double
9 , nor_oper_temp_to , double
# Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data
4 , gcp_npd_from , short
5 , gcp_npd_to , short
6 , rcp_npd_from , short
7 , rcp_npd_to , short
90
________________ Reference Data
3. Reference Data
The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) enables you to define and modify the reference
data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data is used to ensure consistency in the
definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It enables you to control and
standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also modify the reference data to reflect company
practices and standards.
The Reference Data for PDS 3D is composed of the following basic components:
Piping Job Specification
Graphic Commodity Data and Physical Dimension Data
Material Description Data
Standard Notes / Code Lists
Label Descriptions
Data
3. Reference
Piping Assembly Definitions
The following illustrates the basic components of the Reference Data for PDS 3D.
91
________________
The Reference Data Manager supports both approved and unapproved reference data for a
project. The Project Control Database contains complete file management data for both an
approved and unapproved version of each type of reference data such as the Piping Job
Specification or the Graphic Commodity Library. This allows revisions to take place in
unapproved files while other activities such as the Piping Designer read the approved files.
Once the information in the unapproved files has been verified, it can be posted to the
approved reference data files.
Delivered Reference Data

The following reference data is delivered in the reference database products for the
corresponding practices (such as RDUSRDB for U.S. practice data or RDDINRDB for DIN
practice data).
Library
File Description Object Text
Physical Dimension Table Library us_pcdim.l us_pcdim.l.t
Piping Job Specification Table Library us_pjstb.l us_pjstb.l.t
Short Material Description Library us_shbom.l -
Long Material Description Library us_lgbom.l -
Specialty Material Description Library us_spbom.l -
For the DIN RDB substitute din_ for us_ in the listed library file names.
The following reference data, which is not unique to any specific practice, is delivered in the
PD_Shell product in the win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib directory.
Library
Graphic Commodity Library pip_gcom.l pip_gcom.l.t
Piping Assembly Library assembly.l assembly.l.t
Label Description Library labels.l -
Standard Note Library std_note.l std_note.l.t
The following reference data for Equipment Modeling is delivered in the PD_EQP product in
the win32app\ingr\pdeqp\dat directory.
Library
Graphic Commodity Library zi_eqpms.lib -
92
________________ Reference Data
Tutorial Definition Library zi_tutlib.lib -
Cell Library equip.cel -
You should never point to the delivered files for your reference data since this could cause
potential problems when you receive a new version of the software. Instead, you should copy
the reference data files to a separate location. The script mkpdsdir.sh will copy the reference
data to the appropriate directories after creating the project directory files.
For each of the reference data libraries, you can copy the delivered libraries or create a new
(empty) library to which you can load customized data.
Data
3. Reference
93
________________
3.1 Piping Job Specification

The Piping Job Specification (PJS) provides selection criteria for piping commodity items,
piping specialty items, and instruments. The information for the Piping Job Specification is
contained in the following files:
Specification/Material Reference Database - database containing the definitions for

piping materials classes, commodity items, specialty items, and tap properties tables.
Spec Table Library - library containing the specification tables referenced in the PJS.
The information in the Specification/Material Reference database and Spec Table Library
tables is also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can extract and modify.
You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager to create or revise the PJS. The Spec
Manager enables you to define or revise the PJS data, and process neutral ASCII files to
define data in the PJS.
3.1.1 Piping Materials Class Data

A piping materials class defines a classification of components based on design data and
service limits. Much of the design data is stored in tables so that common information can be
accessed by more than one piping materials class.
The Piping Materials Class Data table contains 23 attributes.
4 , version_no , character(2)
5 , revision_date , character(10)
6 , fluid_code , character(6) , standard note 125
8 , corrosion_allow , double
9 , mat_description , short , standard note 148
10, service_lim_table , character(6)
11, diameter_table , character(6)
12, thickness_table , character(6)
13, materials_table , character(6)
14, thickness_equation , character(6)
15, branch_table , character(6)
16, tap_data_table , character(6)
17, vent_drain_macro , character(6)
18, gasket_separation , character(8)
21, revision_mngt_date , integer
22, bend_deflect_table , character(6)
23, pipe_length_table , character(6)
A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file

win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\classes.pmc. The following is a partial listing for this
neutral file. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by Piping Materials
94
________________
Piping Job Specification
Class.
Data
3. Reference
95
________________
3.1.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data

The Piping Commodity Specification Data defines all the components, pipes, bolts, and
gaskets associated with a particular Piping Materials Class. It defines the standard
components found in a manufacturers catalog (commonly referred to as off-the-shelf
components). Because the Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping
Materials Class, a separate set of commodity items must be defined for each Piping Materials
Class database table.
3.1.2.1 Connect Point Data
Information for connect point data is defined in terms of two types of connect points known as
green and red connect points. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets
of data:
If data is only shown under the green connect point, it applies to all ends of the
component.
If a component has ends with different nominal diameters (regardless of other end
properties) the larger nominal diameter is designated as the green connect point.
If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which
differ, the following rules apply:
If the ends have different termination types (regardless of the values for
schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest codelist
number are designated as the green connect point.
If the termination types are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thickness
differ, the stronger end(s) is designated as the green connect point.
The Piping Commodity Specification Data table contains 28 attributes:
2 , piping_mater_class , character(16) , index 1
10, gcp_sch_thk , character(8)
96
________________ Piping Commodity Specification Data

18, commodity_code , character(16)
19, model_code , character(6)
The following is a sample neutral file for the Piping Commodity Specification Data. Entries
in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by commodity_name.
Data
3. Reference
A set of neutral files for US practice are delivered in the files
win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\*.pcd (one for each piping materials class specified in the
classes.pmc file).
A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the

win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory.
bend_tbl.pcd fpipe.pcd metric_npd.pcd

equiv_npd.pcd gasket.pcd piplen_tbl.pcd
fluid_code.pcd gskt_tbl.pcd thickness.pcd
97
________________
3.1.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data

This database table contains data for a specific specialty item. It is used to define those
specialty items which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The
specialty items are defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by Piping Materials
Class.
You can also place specialty items interactively in the model by defining the
necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the Material
Reference Database are required for these interactive definitions.
The Piping Specialty Specification Data table contains 25 attributes.
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file

win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\specialty.data.
98
3.1.4 Instrument Component Specification Data

This table contains the data for a specific instrument item. It is used to define the instruments
which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The instruments are
defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by PMC.
You can also place instruments interactively in the model by defining the
necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the Material
Reference Database are required for these interactive definitions.
Data
3. Reference
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file

win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\instrment.data.
99
________________
3.1.5 Tap Properties Data

This table contains the tap properties data that is a function of the tap properties table name
and the nominal piping diameter. These tables define the piping taps which can be added to
any of the components included in a piping materials class. The system uses the information
in these tables and the nominal diameter to provide values for rating, end preparation,
schedule/thickness, and tap code. Tap tables do not allow a NPD range; there must be an
individual entry for each tap diameter.
2 , tap_table_name , character(6)
5 , end_preparation , short , standard note 330
7 , sched_thick , character(8)
8 , tap_material_code , character(10)

win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\taps.data.
100
Double_Spacing
Order= 2 3 5 4 6 7
! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1988
Table= C001
! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps
! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code
0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX
> 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064
0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX
> 0.75 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$75421064
0.75 691 - 591 NREQD E$75591XXX
> 1 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E001421064
1 691 - 591 NREQD E001591XXX
> 1.25 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$2421064
1.25 691 - 591 NREQD E1$2591XXX
> 1.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$5421064
1.5 691 - 591 NREQD E1$5591XXX
> 2 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E002421064
2 691 - 591 NREQD E002591XXX
2.5 691 - 591 NREQD E2$5591XXX
> 3 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E003421064
3 691 - 591 NREQD E003591XXX
3.5 691 - 591 NREQD E3$5591XXX
> 4 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E004421064
4 691 - 591 NREQD E004591XXX
5 691 - 591 NREQD E005591XXX
Data
3. Reference
6 691 - 591 NREQD E006591XXX
8 691 - 591 NREQD E008591XXX
10 691 - 591 NREQD E010591XXX
12 691 - 591 NREQD E012591XXX
14 691 - 591 NREQD E014591XXX
16 691 - 591 NREQD E016591XXX
18 691 - 591 NREQD E018591XXX
20 691 - 591 NREQD E020591XXX
24 691 - 591 NREQD E024591XXX
26 691 - 591 NREQD E026591XXX
28 691 - 591 NREQD E028591XXX
30 691 - 591 NREQD E030591XXX
32 691 - 591 NREQD E032591XXX
34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX
36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX
42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX
48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX
3.1.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material

Data
The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is
dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness.
This table is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports and
requisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawing
extraction.
101
________________
There are multiple occurrences for a specific commodity code and a specific pair of green and
red nominal piping diameters in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table
because schedule/thickness is not included in the commodity code.
2 , sys_commodity_code , character(16)
3 , gcp_nom_diam , short
4 , rcp_nom_diam , short
6 , rcp_sch_thk , character(8)
7 , commodity_code , character(16) , index 1
8 , weld_weight , double
9 , unit_price , double
10, manhours , double
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pcd_size.data.
3.1.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data

The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity
item that is dependent on both the piping commodity code and nominal piping diameter range.
This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material
control. It is not used for welds, bolts, nuts, or gaskets, but is reserved for other types of
implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a specific commodity item. It is also used for
reporting the implied components of a commodity item (for example, cap screws).
A unique commodity code must be defined for each commodity definition. For example, if a
commodity code is defined for gate valves from 2" to 14", but you want a different description
for a 12" gate valve, you must assign a new commodity code to the 12" valve.
2 , sys_commodity_code , character(16)
5 , rcp_from_nom_diam , short
6 , rcp_to_nom_diam , short
7 , commodity_code , character(16) , index 1
8 , quantity , double
9 , fabrication_cat , short
10, standard_note_no , short

win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\implied.data.
102
________________
Piping Commodity Specification Data
Data
3. Reference
103
________________
3.1.8 PJS Tables and Functions

The following tables, equations, and calculations are considered part of the Piping Job
Specification even though they are not stored in the Reference Database. The table/equation
names are defined in the Piping Materials Class Data. The actual tables and equations are
stored in the Piping Job Specification Table Library.
Temperature and Pressure Service Limits table
This table includes the sets of temperatures and pressures that define the boundaries of
acceptability for a piping materials class.
Nominal Piping Diameter table
The NPD tables lists the diameters for piping and tubing which are valid within any
piping materials class which references this table.
Thickness Data table
Thickness data is determined as a function of the table name and nominal piping
diameter. These tables include the minimum, retirement, thread, and preferred
thicknesses required in the calculation of piping wall thickness. The tables provide the
actual thickness; not a schedule. Therefore, there must be an individual entry for each
diameter. You cannot use an NPD range.
Materials Data table
This table consists of the materials data that is a function of the table name, material
grade, wall thickness range, and temperature. These tables include the properties which
are required for the calculation of piping wall thickness.
Piping Wall Thickness equation and Branch Reinforcement calculation
These tables define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branch
reinforcement to resist positive pressure. The actual equations and their logic are
hardcoded in the software.
Branch Insertion table
A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches.
Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches as a
function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the intersecting
lines.
The types of branch connections include reinforcing weld, coupling, threadolet,

reducing tee, nipolet, reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, weldolet, and so forth.
104
________________ PJS Tables and Functions
Gasket Separation table
These tables define the gasket gap to be used for a given nominal diameter and
maximum temperature. For each bolted end, the system uses the applicable table, the
NPD of the end, and the maximum temperature for the gasket to be used to determine
the gap thickness to be used at the end. Lines in this table are sorted by NPD first and
maximum temperature second.
Data
3. Reference
105
________________
3.2 Graphic Commodity Data and

Physical Dimension Data
The graphic commodity data is used to define commodity items, specialty items, instruments,
and pipe supports. The Graphic Commodity Library contains the parametric symbol
definitions required to place piping and instrument components in a 3D model. When you
place a component the system uses the Piping Job Specification to select the appropriate
component from the parametric symbol definition library which then accesses the component
dimensional data.
The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries:
Graphic Commodity Library - contains the parametric definitions for the commodity
items. Entries in this library use the EDEN programming language.
Physical Dimension Libraries - contains dimension data for the commodity items. (A
different Physical Dimension Library is required for each type of practice such as, U.S.,
DIN, or British Standard)
The parametric descriptions and dimension tables are also delivered in the form of text
libraries which you can extract and modify using the Graphic Data Library Manager and
Physical Data Library Manager.
Refer to Chapter 4, How PDS Works, for examples of parametric definitions and dimension
tables.
106
________________ Material Description Data
3.3 Material Description Data

The Material Description Data is accessed for
Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database
Other miscellaneous reporting
Interfaces to material control systems
Stress analysis
Isometric drawing extraction.
The Material Description Data consists of the commodity item data which is not stored in the
Design Database, which is not required for the creation of graphic symbologies, and which is
not part of the geometric data. This data is contained in the following files:
Material Data in the Specification/Material Database - database tables containing

definitions for commodity items, criteria for implied material, and weld data.
Data
3. Reference
Short Material Description Library - contains the short material descriptions for
commodity items and taps.
Long Material Description Library - contains the long material descriptions for
commodity items.
Specialty Material Description Library - contains the material descriptions for specialty
items.
The material descriptions are also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can modify
and post to the libraries. The following shows a portion of a neutral file for the short material
description library.
! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS
! Date/Time: Wed Jul 7 14:38:03 1993

! Processed Library /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/us_shbom.l
!Cmdty Code ====================================Description========================================

CHAIN_1003 Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]
DAABAXAABE Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs
with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21
DBAAAXBAAB Fire hydrant, CL125 FFFE, 5" size, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle, two 2.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps
and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B
DCBGDXEADA Hose rack, 300#, FTE, w/valve, wall mount, rt hand w/100 ft hose & fog nozzle, Powhatan 30-333
DDAXCJDAAA Spray sprinkler, MTE, filled cone w/rupture disc, 304, Grinnell, Mulsifyre Projector S-1
FAAAAAWAAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAAAAWWAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, cement lined, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABADIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAADBDFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-XXS bore
GEAAAZZADF Paddle spacer, CL150, FFTBE, ASTM-A516-70, Aitken Z1, [429]
PAAAAACIIA Pipe, S-104, BE,
PAAAAAJAAA Pipe, S-60, BE, ASTM-A53-B Type S
PAAAAAWWXM Pipe, [401], BE, ASTM-A53-B Type S, cement lined, treated & wrapped
PAAAABBAAE Pipe, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A106-B
PADAABDGFD Pipe, S-XXS, PE, ASME-SA335-P11
107
________________
PAFAAAWAAA Pipe bend, [403], BE, 6 NPD rad, ASTM-A53-B Type S

POAAAADIIA Nipple, BE, S-80S, 3" long, ASTM-A312-TP304 smls
PRPAXZZAAA Reinforcing pad, [425], ASTM-A53-B
PUBZZAWVAA Pipe, [401], SPE/BLE, push-on jt, 10 ft lay lngth, ASTM-A74 w/rubber gskt
QAEZZAKTAB Reducing coupling, S-80, SE, ASTM-D2467
SAAQZZZAAA Coupling, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
SCAQZZZAAA Cap, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105
SHAQZZZABB Union, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A350-LF2, MSS-SP-83
SLAQZZZAAA 90 deg elbow, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
SLAQZZZABB 90 deg elbow, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.11
SLCQZZZAAA 45 deg elbow, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
SLCQZZZABB 45 deg elbow, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.11
STAQZZZAAA Tee, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
STBQZZZAAA Reducing branch tee, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
STLQZZZAAA Lateral, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
STMQZZZABB Reducing branch lateral, CL3000, SWE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.11
TPAZVZZAAA Plug, MTE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
UAAEGZZVBB 1/4 bend, CL250, PE/MJBE, AWWA-C110, dbl thk cement lined w/gskt, glnd & blt
URAEKZZVBB Concentric reducer, CL250, PLE/MJBSE, AWWA-C110, dbl thk cement lined w/gskt, glnd & blt
VAAAUXJAAA Gate valve, CL150, FFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A395, brnz trim, Stockham D-623
VAAAUXJAGR Gate valve, CL150, FFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A395, brnz trim, GO w/side handwheel, Stockham D-623
VAABAHCCAA Gate valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A216-WCB, trim 8, Crane 47
VBABALCFAA Globe valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A216-WCB, trim 12, Crane 143
VBABALCFRE Globe valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A216-WCB, NACE, trim 12, Crane 143
VCAAUXJCAA Check valve, CL150, FFFE, BC, swing, ASTM-A395, brnz trim, Stockham D-931
VDABAUIBAA Ball valve, CL150, RFFE, red. port, end entry, firesafe, ASTM-A216-WCB, plated CS ball, CS trim, Jamesbury 5150
VEADAZEBAA Plug valve, CL150, RFFE, lubricated, ASTM-A216-WCB, 125 Ra finish, Rockwell 1945
VEADAZECGR Plug valve, CL150, RFFE, lubricated, ASTM-A216-WCB, 125 Ra finish, GO w/side handwheel, Rockwell 4149
VFLAUQRJGR Butterfly valve, CL125, FFFE, ASTM-A395, trim 316, EPT seat, GO w/side handwheel, Centerline Series 504
VYFSAHEEAA Y globe valve, CL1500, SWE, WB, OS&Y, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Rockwell/Edward 36124
WAAAAAWAAA 90 deg LR elbow, [403], BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WADAAAWABL 45 deg LR elbow, [403], BE, ASTM-A420-WPL6, ANSI-B16.9
WBAFBAWIKB Stub end, RFLFE/BE, ASTM-A403-WP304, ANSI-B16.9, [409]|bore to match|
WCAAAAWAAA Cap, [403], BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WOAAAAWIFB Weldolet, [412], BE, |weldolet, |ASTM-A182-F304L
WOBSABQAFA Sockolet, CL3000, BE/SWE, |sockolet, |ASTM-A105
WOCTABQAFB Thredolet, CL3000, BE/FTE, |thredolet, |ASTM-A350-LF2
WODAAAWAFA Elbolet, [412], BE, |elbolet, |ASTM-A105
WOIAAAWAFA Latrolet, [412], BE, |latrolet, |ASTM-A105
WOUSABQAFA Flatolet, CL3000, BE/SWE, |flatolet, |ASTM-A105
WRAAAAWAAA Concentric reducer, [414], BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WRBAAAWAAA Eccentric reducer, [414], BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WTAAAAWFAL Tee, [403], BE, ASTM-A234-WP9, ANSI-B16.9
WTBAAAWAAA Reducing branch tee, [416], BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WZBZZZZAZA Reinforcing weld, [423], carbon steel
XAAAAZZICC Gasket, CL150, G52, 0.0625" thk comp sheet, org fiber/nitrile binder, full face, ANSI-B16.21
XDAABZZQSG Gasket, CL150, G653, 0.125" thk, 304 spiral wnd, graph filled, CS center ring, API-601
YAJBPFCFFW Cap screws, ASTM-A193-B7,$0.625" diam x 1.5" lg
YBJIPFKFFW Cap screws, ASTM-A193-B7,$1" diam x 3.5" lg
YZZZHZZFFB B44, ASTM-A193-B8C Cl.1 studs w/ASTM-A194-8C hvy hex nuts
YZZZMZZAAA B71, ASTM-A307-B machine bolts w/ASTM-A563-A hvy hex nuts
The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create, revise, and delete data in
the Material Description Libraries. You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager to
load the material data tables in the Specification/Material Database.
Refer to Creating Material Takeoffs and Other Reports, page 231 for more information on
material descriptions.
108
________________ Standard Note Library
3.4 Standard Note Library

The text for code-listed attributes and standard notes is stored in the Standard Note Library.
All attributes identified as code-listed are actually stored as integer values. The code list text
associated with the integer is stored in the Standard Note Library. Information in the Standard
Note Library is identified by note number and note type. Output from the library consists of
free-format text which forms the standard note.
3.5 Label Description Library

The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following label types used in
PDS 3D:
Drawing view specific labels
Drawing view identification labels
Drawing block labels
Data
3. Reference
Alphanumeric labels
Displayable attribute messages
Material description attribute messages
Isometric drawing labels.
These labels are intelligent graphics with links to the material database.
The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a
label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what
information comprises the label.)
109
________________
3.6 Piping Assembly Library

The Piping Assembly Library (PAL) contains the piping assembly definitions which define
the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in
the model.
A Piping Assembly object library and text library which contain the definitions for basic
assemblies are included in the product delivery.
The following shows a sample PAL file for a drain:
# Drain assembly
PAL DRAIN
!
! This assembly will place a drain. The user needs to place a 1"
! sockolet at the point the drain is desired.
!
PLACE FITTING, 6Q3C88 , BY CP1
!
! The data from the component spec is read into the keywords.
! TERM_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the numeric value for end preparation (eg. 21)
! PR_RATING_1 TO 5 gets the pressure rating
! GEN_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the textual value for end preparation (eg. MALE)
!
LOAD_SPEC_DATA = 6Q1C76
!
! This IF statement determines if an optional flange is needed before
! the gate valve is placed.
!
IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN
OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1
OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1
PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2
ENDIF
!
! Places a gate valve. Notice in the spec that this type of gate valve
! is different than a 6Q2C01.
!
PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C76 , BY CP1
IF ( GEN_TYPE_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN
OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_2
OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_2
PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1
ENDIF
!
! This command allows the user to pick which component to place. If the
! option command is not used the s/w will choose option 1. In this instance,
! without the OPTION_CODE command will cause an error because there are no
! option 1 attributes available for 6Q2C16. Another possiblilty would be to
! use OPTION_CODE = PROMPT. The user will be prompted for which component is
! desired.
!
OPTION_CODE = 163
PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C16 , BY CP1
END
110
________________ Standard Note Library
The resulting graphics created by the PAL file look like this:
Graphics Placed by Drain Assembly
Data
3. Reference
111
________________
112
________________ How PDS Works
4. How PDS Works

This sections provides an overview of how the various parts of PDS are used to place
components in a model. It also outlines how the information in the model and the
accompanying engineering data in the Databases is used for material control.
All of the examples used in this chapter use the delivered reference data. This chapter is
intended to illustrate how PDS uses the reference data rather than point out various
customizable features. Detailed customization information is provided in the Spec Writing for
PDS 3D Course Guide and in the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide.
4.1 What Happens When I Place a

Component?
This is a good starting point for a discussion of the various parts that make up PDS and how
these parts work together. The figure on the following page illustrates what happens when
you place a Gate Valve in a piping model.
PDS makes extensive use of reference data to control the design process. Because PDS uses
reference data to control placement operations, it is said to be specification-driven.
When you select a component for placement in the model, the system
uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to
search for the selected item name in the Specification Material Reference Database. If
the selected item is found in the RDB, the system reads the specification data for the
parameters required to place the component. Included in this information is the model
Placement
4. Component
code (or specialty item number) for the selected component and the names of the spec
tables defined for the Piping Materials Class.
uses the model code (or specialty item number), derived from the RDB, to access the
Graphic Commodity Library. The definitions in the Graphic Commodity Library
determine the physical tables required to place the component and call the tables in the
Physical Dimension Library.
places the symbol graphics in the model design file and writes the nongraphic
information for the component in the database.
113
________________
114
________________ How PDS Works
The Piping Designer provides a graphics environment for the creation and modification of
piping and instrumentation. The graphics environment will be discussed in more detail in
Chapter 5.
The Place Component command activates a form used to control the placement operation.
4.1.1 Spec Access

The system uses the active parameters to access information in the Specification/Material
Reference Database. The active segment parameters define the data that will be used to place
Placement
4. Component
the component.
4.1.2 Piping Materials Class Data

The Piping Materials Class setting defines a number of basic parameters. In this example
the Piping Materials Class is set to 1C0031.
115
________________
Piping Materials Class Code

The delivered reference data uses a 6 character code for the PMC based on the following
convention.
F - Pressure Rating
A - Material Group
XXXX - Sequence Number from Code List Set 148
Following this convention, 1C0031 is interpreted as
1 - CL150
C - Carbon Steels
0031 - CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8
Therefore, PMC 1C0031 equals 150# Carbon Steel, Standard Raised Face, with trim 8.
Refer to the listing of Code List Set 148 in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide
for information on all the codes.
An alternate naming scheme is also described under Code List Set 148. This
alternate scheme uses the convention:
A - Materials Group
B - Materials Type
C - Detail Features
D - Corrosion Allowance
E - Service
F - Pressure Rating
Following this convention, CAC5C1 is interpreted as
C - Carbon Steels
A - CS
C - Std RF. std trim
5 - 0.063"
C - Process. hot (-20 to 800 F)
1 - CL150
You can use either of these conventions or use any standard character code up
to 16 characters.
Temperature Pressure Table

This attribute identifies the table used to determine maximum pressure as a function of
temperature. This table includes the pressure and temperature sets that form the boundary for
which the commodity items included in this piping materials class are suitable.
116
________________ How PDS Works
Table_Data_Definition L1001
! Description= B16.5 CL150-1.1, -20 to 800
! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=13-Feb-1987
No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1
Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One
Units= DF, PSIG
! Temperature Pressure
-20 285
100 285
200 260
300 230
400 200
500 170
600 140
650 125
700 110
750 95
800 80
END
Diameter Table
This attribute identifies the table used to determine the nominal piping diameter (NPD) values
for piping and tubing which are valid for this piping materials class. The following table will
allow the placement of 1/2" to 36" piping:
Placement
4. Component
Table_Data_Definition D036
! Description= From 0.5 to 36
! By=NP Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=22-Jan-1987
Units= NPD_IN
! Diam
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
117
________________
26
28
30
32
34
36
END
Thickness Table
This attribute defines a table to be used for optional wall thickness and branch reinforcement
calculations. When the table is used, thickness data is determined as a function of nominal
piping diameter. The thickness table includes the minimum, retirement, thread, and preferred
thicknesses required in the calculation of piping wall thickness. It provides the actual
thickness; not a schedule. Therefore, there must be an individual entry for each diameter.
Table_Data_Definition TA501
! Description= A,0.063CA,0.0071D<=24, 0.0075D>=26
! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=31-Jan-1987
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN
! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses
0.5 .147 .06 - S-160 - - - -
0.75 .154 .06 - S-XS - - - -
1 .179 .06 - S-XS - - - -
1.5 .2 .06 - S-XS - - - -
2 .154 .06 - S-STD - - - -
3 .216 .06 - S-STD - - - -
4 .237 .07 - S-STD - - - -
6 .28 .1 - S-STD - - - -
8 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -
10 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -
12 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -
Materials Table
This parameter defines a materials data table used to determine the material properties for
optional wall thickness calculations. The units of measure used in this table must be
consistent with those used in the corresponding Temperature-Pressure Table.
Table_Data_Definition ML01
! Description= Materials per ANSI-B31.3b-1988
! By=EPZ Ckd By=RSM Rev=3 Date=03-Oct-1989
Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One
Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN
118
________________ How PDS Works
! Mill Tolrnce
! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value
116 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -
116 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -
116 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -
116 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -
116 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -
116 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -
142 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -
142 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -
142 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -
142 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -
142 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -
142 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -
162 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -
162 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -
162 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -
162 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -
162 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -
162 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -
Thickness Equations
Placement
4. Component
Thickness equations define formulas for the optional calculation of piping wall thickness and
branch reinforcement to resist positive pressure. The actual equations and their logic are
hardcoded in the software.
EL01
Source - ANSI-B31.3c.1986 [Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping]

Thickness logic from paragraph 304.1, equation 3a
Reinforcement logic from paragraph 304.3.3 & Code - Appendix H
PD
t = _________
2(SE+PY)
119
________________
where
P Design pressure
D Pipe outside diameter
S Allowable stress read from the Materials table
E Joint quality factor determined from the wall thickness attribute Cxxx where xxx is 100
times E
Y Coefficient Y read from the Materials table
A Additional Thickness (in inches or mm)
Gasket Gap / Table

This attribute defines either a single gasket gap value or a table used to determine the gasket
gap based on nominal diameter and maximum temperature. If a table is specified, the system
uses the NPD of each bolted end and the maximum temperature for the gasket at that end to
determine the gap thickness.
In this example, the actual gap value (.125) is used rather than a table name.
4.1.3 Piping Commodity Data

The following shows the delivered commodity item data as defined in 1c0031.pcd.
The active segment parameters define the data that will be used to place the component.
Continuing with our example, we will use the information for a 6 inch gate valve.
120
________________ How PDS Works
Item Name and Model Code

When you select the Gate option from the Place Component form, the system sets the Item Name
to 6Q1C01. This is the item name for a gate valve in the delivered reference data. The
corresponding Model Code for this Item Name is GAT.
The item name is also called the AABBCC code because it is composed of a number of parameters.
For example, the code 6Q1C01 breaks down as follows
AA 6Q Piping In-Line Component

BB 1C Valves
CC 01 Gate Valve
Option Code
The option code is a code-listed value that tells the system to retrieve the primary commodity item,
a secondary commodity item, or another special option from the Piping Commodity Data.
This parameter allows you to select from predefined options at placement. If no option is specified,
the system defaults to option 1 (primary commodity item). Option 2 is reserved as the secondary
commodity item. The other options are determined by values for Code List Set 400.
Green and Red Connect Point Data

Since a standard gate valve has the same properties at both ends (connect points) only green
Placement
4. Component
connect point data is required.
! AABBCC - - - - - - Green CP - - - - - -
! Code Opt From To Prp Rating Sc/Th TS
6Q1C01 1 3 12 21 CL150 NREQD 5
The From To values define the range of NPD values supported by this definition in this example
3" to 12".
The End Preparation (Prp) is a code-listed attribute that identifies the end preparation for the
connect point. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values
2 - 199 bolted terminations

300 - 399 male terminations
400 - 599 female terminations
Using the values defined in Code List Set 330, the setting 21 indicates RFFE (Raised-Face Flanged
End).
121
________________
The Rating identifies the pressure rating for the connect point. The setting CL150 refers to ANSI
pressure rating CL150. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as the
pressure rating value (150 in this example).
The Schedule Thickness (Sc/Th) exists as alphanumeric data. The value NREQD is used in cases
where all of the following conditions apply:
The thickness value is not required in purchasing the component.
Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.
Either stress analysis is not applicable or, if applicable, the component is to be considered
infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.
The Table Suffix (TS) is a code-listed attribute (CL576) used to further reference the source of the
generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data.
For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the green connect point. The value 5 is the
default for US practice. It represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables for
dimensional parameters is defined.
End Termination Type Basis for Table Values

Raised-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42,
in this order of precedence
Commodity Code
The commodity code is a user-assigned code that together with the NPD and schedule/thickness
uniquely defines the component. It defines the customers commodity code (or part number). This
attribute is the index into the Material Description Library.
Using the delivered reference data, the commodity code VAABAHCCAA represents
V - Valve
A - Gate Valve
A - CL150
B - Raised Face Flanged Ends
A - Carbon Steel
H - Trim 8
CC - Crane 47
AA - Blank
For valves, the commodity code also defines the name of the dry weight table (required for stress
analysis). Refer to Appendix E in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a listing
of the delivered commodity codes.
122
________________ How PDS Works
Geometric Industry Standard

This code-listed attribute (CL575) identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry
standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of
the commodity item can be deduced. This parameter represents the vendor or industry standard,
and the material if either affects the dimensions of the commodity item.
Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to US piping practices.
The value 40 indicates
40 = ANSI-B16.10 [Dimensions of Ferrous Valves ||]
Modifier
This attribute has various uses depending on the type of commodity item. For a valve, it represents
the code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type) which defines the symbol description and
the source of the physical data. If this value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator is not
displayed when placing the component.
Reviewing CL550, the value 3 indicates a handwheel operator.
Materials Grade
This code-listed attribute (CL145) identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and
joint efficiency for the component. This data is used in wall thickness calculations. It can also be
used to access physical data in the Graphic Commodity Library.
Reviewing CL145, the value 252 indicates A216-WCB.
Placement
4. Component
Weight code
This code-listed attribute (CL578) defines the weight code for the component. It determines the
table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those cases where
material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric
industry standard.
Reviewing CL578, the value 52 indicates
52 = 490 pcf [Carbon steel, low Cr alloy steel, stainless steel]
123
________________
Fabrication Category
This code-listed attribute (CL180) identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a
component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated.
The value 7 indicates Contractor supplied, field fabricated (CSFF).
4.1.4 Table Access

If all the required information is found in the Specification/Material Reference Database, the
system performs table access to determine the geometry and dimensions of the component.
Using the Review Component Placement option of the Diagnostics command, you can
review the table access operations used to place the component.
The Place Component Error Data form displays the physical data libraries and Eden
modules that were accessed to place the component. The initial display lists the Eden
modules that were accessed. Indented lines indicate a module which was called from another
module. The system places an asterisk (*) beside the module name where Eden stopped
executing.
The system uses the model code (or specialty item number) to access the graphic commodity
library. The definitions in the graphic commodity library determine the physical tables
required to place the component and call the tables in the physical commodity library.
The Graphic Commodity Library (GCL) provides data for commodity items, engineered
items, and instruments. It is basically a catalog of component data which is accessed to
124
________________ How PDS Works
determine physical data based on user specifications (such as NPD and end preparation)
assign connect point data from the Specification Material Reference Database
define the parametric shape for the model graphics.
PDS Piping uses the Eden Parametric Language to define and place components, specialty
items, operators, and envelopes. Eden is a high- level programming language which uses
information from the Material Reference Database and model to access parametric and
dimensional data.
Eden is composed of three major types of modules
Symbol Processors
Physical Data Subroutines
Parametric Shape Definitions
These modules are designed to carry out two functions: data definition and graphic
presentation. The modular approach provides for efficient storage of information in these
libraries by enabling common information to be shared by different symbols.
Placement
4. Component
125
________________
Eden Module Relationships
4.1.5 Symbol Processors

A symbol processor is the controlling function or logic used to produce the graphics for a
commodity item, piping specialty, instrument, pipe support, or interference envelope. During
component placement, the symbol processor
accesses the active component design parameters
assigns connect points
Calls the required physical data modules
126
________________ How PDS Works
determines and calls the required parametric shape modules.
The system retrieves the active component parameters which are dependent upon a connect
point from the RDB in terms of green, red, or tap connect point properties. The symbol
definition assigns the data corresponding to these connect point types (green, red, or tap) to
the physical connect point numbers (CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4 or CP5).
The first line of the Eden module defines the type of module and the module name. The
following statement is used in the Eden modules to indicate a symbol processor module.
Symbol_Processor module name
The module name is determined by the type of component being placed (commodity item or
specialty item). For a commodity item, the system searches for the Model Code of the
commodity item as the module name. If the Model Code is blank in the Piping Commodity
Specification Data, the system searches for the Item Name as the module name.
The following lists the symbol processor GAT which is used to control the placement of a
gate valve.
! REGULAR PATTERN, BOLTED OR MALE ENDS GATE VALVE

Symbol_Processor GAT
Call Assign_Connect_Point ( GREEN, CP1 )
Call Assign_Connect_Point ( RED, CP2 )
physical_data_source = V1 // Standard_Type
Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source )
parametric_shape = V1
Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape )
Valve_Operator = DABS ( Valve_Operator )
If ( Valve_Operator .NE. 0 ) Then
If ( Valve_Operator .LT. 1000 ) Then
Subcomponent = OP // Valve_Operator
Else
Subcomponent = A // Valve_Operator
EndIf
Placement
4. Component
Operator_Orient = FALSE
EndIf
Stop
End
Listing for Symbol Processor GAT
4.1.6 Sub-Symbol Processor

A subcomponent call in a symbol processor module indicates a sub-symbol processor.
Subcomponents are additions to symbols such as an operator on a valve.
The first line of a sub-symbol processor module indicates the module type and the module
name.
127
________________
Sub_Symbol_Processor module name
The sub-symbol processor name for operators is a concatenation of the characters OP_ and the
modifier value from the Piping Commodity Specification Data in the RDB. The value is
expressed as a code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type). If the value is a
positive number (such as 3) the operator is placed with the valve. If the value is a negative
number (such as -3) the operator is not placed with the valve. (This is useful in segregating
large diameter valves which almost always have a valve operator from small diameter valves
which frequently do not have an operator.)
The symbol processor for the gate valve calls a sub-symbol processor (Subcomponent =
OP // Valve_Operator) which places an operator on the valve. The following
depicts the sub-symbol processor OP_3 which is used to control the placement of a hand
wheel operator on the valve.
! HANDWHEEL OPERATOR
Sub_Symbol_Processor OP_3
If ( Operator_Orient .EQ. TRUE ) Then
prompt = 1.0
Call Prompt_to_Orient_Operator ( prompt )
EndIf
physical_data_source = OPERATOR_3
parametric_shape = OP3
Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape )
Stop
End
Listing for Sub-Symbol Processor OP_3
4.1.7 Physical Data Definitions

The system uses the physical data definitions to determine the dimension data, weight data,
and surface area data using the active design parameters. Physical data modules are identified
by the statement
Physical_Data_Definition module name
as the first line in the Eden module.
The module name for a physical data module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2, and
so forth for valves) and a generic type of geometric industry standard (such as AMS or DIN).
You can define multiple physical data modules for the same symbol depending on the type of
standard being referenced (for example, V1_AMS for American standards and V1_DIN for
European standards).
You can manage ten different sets of logic for table naming conventions for the following
industry practices. The corresponding table suffix ranges and the suffix for the Piping Eden
physical data modules are indicated below.
128
________________ How PDS Works
Practice Range Suffix

U.S. Practice 1-99 AMS
European - DIN 100-199 DIN
European - British Standard 200-299 BRITISH_STD
European - Practice A 300-399 EURO_A
European - Practice B 400-499 EURO_B
International - JIS 500-599 JIS
International - Australian 600-699 AUS
International - Practice A 700-799 INT_A
International - Practice B 800-899 INT_B
Company Practice 900-999 COMPANY
The geometric industry standard for a component is defined in the Piping Commodity Data
table of the Material Reference Database. Each component must be assigned a geometric
industry standard if it is to use physical data tables.
For most of the delivered symbols, the physical data modules are classified into two
categories: specific and generic. The specific physical data module is called by the symbol
processor. This module then calls a generic physical data module.
Specific Physical Data Modules

The physical data module V1_AMS determines the specific dimensions (face-to-center and
face-to-face) and other physical properties for a gate valve. This is the module called by the
symbol processor GAT
Physical_Data_Definition V1_AMS
physical_data_source = VALVE_2_AMS
Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_A, input, output )
Surface_Area = Output_1
Wet_Weight = Output_2
Placement
4. Component
F_to_C_Dim_1 = Output_3
If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 ) Then
F_to_C_Dim_2 = F_to_C_Dim_1
Else
F_to_C_Dim_2 = Output_4
EndIf
F_to_F_Dim = F_to_C_Dim_1 + F_to_C_Dim_2
If ( Valve_Operator .LE. 24.0 ) Then
Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_W, input, output )
Dry_Weight = Output_1
EndIf
Return
End
Listing for Physical Data Module V1_AMS
129
________________
Generic Physical Data Modules

The generic modules contain information which is common to more than one symbol such as
flange thickness, gasket separation, and outside diameter. The physical data module
V1_AMS calls another physical data module VALVE_2_AMS which contains the generic
dimension data for all valves with two connect points.
Physical_Data_Definition VALVE_2_AMS
Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1
If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then
table_name = BLT // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output )
Facing_OD_1 = Output_1
Thickness_1 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_1 = Output_3
Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 - Seat_Depth_1
CP_Offset_1 = Gasket_Sep_1
If ( Symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then
Thickness_1 = 0.0
Depth_1 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0
Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1
Else
table_name = MAL_300_5
Depth_1 = Thickness_1
Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2
Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1
EndIf
Else
If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. MALE ) Then
table_name = MAL // Term_Type_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Thickness_1 = 0.0
Depth_1 = 0.0
Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0
CP_Offset_1 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1
Else
table_name = FEM // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Depth_1 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0
Thickness_1 = 0.0
If ( symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then

Depth_1 = 0.0
CP_Offset_1 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0
Else
CP_Offset_1 = -Depth_1
130
________________ How PDS Works
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
If ( Term_Type_2 .EQ. Term_Type_1 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 )
Then
Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_1
Pipe_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_1
Body_OD_2 = Body_OD_1
Thickness_2 = Thickness_1
Depth_2 = Depth_1
Seat_depth_2 = Seat_Depth_1
CP_Offset_2 = CP_Offset_1
Else
If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then
table_name = BLT // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red
Thickness_2 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_2 = Output_3
Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 - Seat_Depth_2
CP_Offset_2 = Gasket_Sep_2
Thickness_2 = 0.0
Depth_2 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0
Else
Depth_2 = Thickness_2
EndIf
Else
table_name = MAL // Term_Type_2 // Gen_Flag_Red
Placement
4. Component
Thickness_2 = 0.0
Depth_2 = 0.0
Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0
CP_Offset_2 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2
Else
table_name = FEM // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red
Depth_2 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0
Thickness_2 = 0.0
Depth_2 = 0.0
CP_Offset_2 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0
Else
CP_Offset_2 = -Depth_2
131
________________
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
Table_Name_A = Item_Name // Geo_Ind_Std // Term_Type_1
Table_Name_W = Commodity_Code
If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 )
Then
Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // A
Else
If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. Gen_Type_2 ) Then
! Male X Male or Bolted X Bolted
! or Female X Female
Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 //
Pr_Rating_2 // A
Else

! Male X Bolted and Male X Female
Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // A
Else
! Bolted X Male and Female X Male
Else
! Bolted X Female and Female X
Bolted
Pr_Rating_2 // A
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
Return
End
Listing for Physical Data Module VALVE_2_AMS
4.1.8 Parametric Shape Definitions

The parametric shape definition describes the graphics symbol (such as bend, flange, or valve
body) which is placed for the component in the model.
Parametric shape definitions are used to place symbol graphics in the model or define
interference envelopes. This involves the following major functions
defining connect point geometry
132
________________ How PDS Works
placing connect points
moving the active location a specified distance
drawing a specific graphic shape
placing a center of gravity location.
Parametric shape definitions are divided into three basic types: model parametric shapes,
detailed parametric shapes, and interference envelopes. The first line of the Eden module
indicates the module type and the module name.
Model Parametric Shape Definitions

Model parametric shapes define the symbol graphics to be placed in the model. For example,
the parametric shape module for a valve consist of a cylinder, two cones, and a cylinder
(flange, valve body, flange).
The first line for these modules is of the form
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name
The module name for a parametric shape module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,
and so forth, for valves).
The parametric shape module V1 determines the model graphics for a valve. This is the
module called by the symbol processor GAT. The parametric shape module OP3 determines
the model graphics for a hand wheel operator. This is the module called by the sub-symbol
processor OP_3.
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition V1
Placement
4. Component
Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR )
Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP1 )
Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_Offset_1 )
Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_1, Facing_OD_1 )
length = F_to_C_Dim_1 - Thickness_1
diameter = 0.0
Call Draw_Cone ( length, Body_OD_1, diameter )
Call Place_COG_Location ( DRY_COG )
Call Place_COG_Location ( WET_COG )
length = F_to_C_Dim_2 - Thickness_2
Call Draw_Cone ( length, diameter, Body_OD_2 )
Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_2, Facing_OD_2 )
Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_offset_2 )
Return
End
Listing for Parametric Shape Module V1
133
________________
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition OP3
Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( OPERATOR )
Call Convert_NPD_to_Subunits ( Nom_Pipe_D_1, dia )
dist = dia + Min_Cyl_Dia * 0.5
angle = 90.0
radius = ( Dimension_2 - Min_Cyl_Dia ) * 0.5
Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Dimension_1, Min_Cyl_Dia )
Call Move_by_Distance ( -dist )
Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Secondary )
Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Normal )
Call Move_Along_Axis ( -radius, Secondary )
Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia )
Return
End
Listing for Parametric Shape Module OP3
134
________________ Physical Data
4.1.9 Physical Data

Selecting the Component Data option of the Place Component Error Data form displays the
physical data used to place the component.
To place a 6" gate valve, the system references the following tables.
Placement
4. Component
135
________________
4.1.9.1 Generic Tables

The spec access for a six-inch gate valve defines the end preparation at both connect points as
Raised Face Flanged End (code list value 21) which is a bolted connection. As shown in the
listing for VALVE_2_AMS, the table name for a bolted connection on a two-connect point
valve is
table_name= BLT // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 //

Gen_Flag_Green
Using the values from the Piping Job Specification (PMC=1C0031, Item Name=6Q1C01), the
actual table name will be
BLT_20_150_5
This table returns the outside diameter, flange thickness, and the seating depth for each end of
the valve. Note that the termination type (20) is used rather than the actual end preparation
value (21).
You can use the Display Table option to display the contents of a table.
136
________________ Specific Tables
4.1.9.2 Specific Tables

The specific tables are used to define the main body of the valve. Since the termination type
is the same at both ends of the valve (bolted), no red connect point data is required. The
required tables are found by referring to the Bolted(G) termination type.
MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A (P15A)
MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B (P15B) - This table is only required if more than eight

outputs are necessary to define a commodity item.
Commodity Code (P59)
Using this information, the dimension tables for a 6" gate valve are:
GAT_40_20_150_A
This table returns the face-to-center dimension for the valve. Table P15B is not
required for a gate valve.
VAABAHCCAA
This table returns the empty weight of the valve, including the weight of the operator.
If the end preparations were different at each end of the valve (such as female threaded by
socket welded) then a different set of tables would be required.
An additional table look-up is required to access the dimensional data for the valve operator.
The following table is required to define the valve operator.
MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (P31A)
Placement
4. Component
Using this table name format, the dimension table for a hand wheel operator on a 6" gate
valve is:
GAT_BLT_150_3_A
This table returns the stem length and the wheel diameter for the handwheel operator.
137
________________
4.2 Placing Components On Existing

Segments
Piping segments are used to define the basic geometry of a pipeline and to carry common
attributes such as material class and NPD. All components placed in a piping model have an
underlying segment.
Segment data is stored in table 12 of the Design Database.
Data specific to a component is stored in table 34 of the Design Database.
When you place components on an existing piping segment (with Place Component or
Automated Placement), the system determines what type of component should be placed
based on the configuration and attributes of the segment(s) at the active placement point.
The Spec Table Library contains a set of tables which are used to determine the type of
component to place and basic information about the components. Refer to the Reference Data
Manager Reference Guide for more information on these tables.
4.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table

The Piping Designer reads the
Commodity Item Name table when
placing a component at the vertex of
an existing piping segment. This
table lists the Item Names of the
components to be used at different
segment configurations (such as
reduction, branching, or direction
changes). It enables you to relate the
component types hard-coded in the
software with the applicable
commodity item codes (item names).
As the system processes the segment
for component placement, it uses the
derived item name from the table to
reference the Piping Commodity
Specification Data table of the
Material/Reference Database.
138
________________ Placing Components On Existing Segments
When placing change of direction

components, this table is used in
conjunction with the Bend Deflection
Table.
Placement
4. Component
139
________________
4.2.2 Bend Deflection Table

The bend deflection table is used
when placing components at the
vertex of an existing piping segment.
The system uses the bend angle at the
segment vertex to determine the type
of component to be placed.
This table defines which full size and

reducing size component types will
be placed for a specified angle range.
The angle is defined as the smallest
angle that the continuation of one
pipe run makes with the other run.
The component types are defined in
the commodity item name table.
4.2.3 Branch Insertion Tables

Each Piping Materials Class
references a set of branch tables: one
for 90-degree branches, one for 45-
degree branches, and one for 45-to-
90 degree branches.
Branch tables define the

reinforcement to be used at tee and
lateral branches as a function of the
acute angle of intersection and the
nominal diameters (first and second
size) for the intersecting lines.
The system accesses the branch table

when placing a component at an
intersection when no branch
component exists at that location.
The system uses the information in

the table and the first and second size
to provide the item name of the
component to be used at the
intersection. Typically, the codes are
from one of the following types:
Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.
140
________________ Bend Deflection Table
Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.
Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.
During branch component placement, the comparison test of header segment data will include
nominal piping diameter, override schedule/thickness and construction status.
Placement
4. Component
141
________________
4.2.4 Placement Examples

This section outlines the placement data for a bend, reducer, and tee placed on an existing
segment.
90 Degree Bend
142
________________
Placement Examples
Reducer (6x4)
Branch (4x4)
Placement
4. Component
143
________________
144
________________ Creating 3D Models
5. Creating 3D Models
This chapter describes the basics of 3D modeling using the Equipment Modeling and Piping
Designer Tasks.
5.1 Modeling Setup Requirements

The following operations must be completed before any modeling activities can take place.
5.1.1 Project Setup

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use the Piping Designer or Equipment Modeling. Refer to the Project
Administrator Reference Guide for information on
Loading PDS 3D products.

Models
5. Creating 3D
Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.
Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.
Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS or Disk Sharing.
145
________________
5.1.2 Reference Data Setup

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for information on defining the
reference data for a project. This data must be defined before you can work in a model. Also
refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for
information on selecting whether to use the approved or unapproved version of the reference
data for a model file.
5.1.3 Seed Files

When you create a project, the system copies a set of seed files from the PD_Shell directory to
the project directroy: drwsdz.dgn, eqpsdz.dgn, and mdlsdz.dgn. You can use the Project
Data Manager to modify the setting in these seed files. This data is often referred to as Type
63 data because it is stored in the Type 63 elements of the design files.
This seed data is discussed throughout the remainder of this chapter. Before creating models,
you should define the seed data to reflect your company practices so that all models will be
created with the same settings.
See chapter 6 of the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for detailed
information on the Project Data Manager.
146
5.1.4 Model Files

The Project Environment Manager is used to create, revise, or delete model files. Refer to
the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating a piping model and
database files.
You can attach reference models defined in the other PDS 3D disciplines while working in a
piping model. Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulating
models for the PDS 3D disciplines.
PDS Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide
PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide
5.1.5 Level Control and Graphical Symbology

The use of reference files provides for 63 display levels in the active design file plus 63 levels
for each referenced discipline. The following example illustrates the levels for a piping model
with attached reference models:
Models
5. Creating 3D
In this example, there are 63 active levels and 252 referenced levels which you can control
(the two equipment models use the same levels and symbology). If a certain type of duct in
the HVAC model resides on Level 30 in that model, and all unapproved Instruments are to be
placed on Level 30 in the piping model, these are treated as two completely different levels.
147
________________
That is, you can turn off the display for the duct types on Level 30 in the HVAC model (via
the Reference Model controls) without effecting the display of unapproved instruments in the
active piping model.
All PDS users are encouraged to develop a logical, organized level control standard to manage
interdiscipline design files. The delivered seed file parameters for each application provide a
logical, organized, and coordinated level designation and control scheme. You can customize
the delivered parameters, but it is highly recommended that careful thought be given to the
custom setup.
Once you develop a convention, whether it be the standard deliverable settings or an

in-house standard, do not change the level or symbology settings after model
graphics have been created. There is no easy way to propagate these changes to the
existing graphics in all the design files. The existing graphics will reflect the old
settings and any new graphics will reflect the modified settings.
Since some applications rely on level assignments to perform basic functions (such as
placement of approved or unapproved items) which are transparent to the user, there is
a very real chance of destroying the integrity of the project if a symbology change is
initiated after the project is under way.
For this reason, Intergraph recommends that you do not change the basic structure of the
symbology without careful thought. Attributes such as line weights, colors, and line types are
open to customization, but they should be established prior to project creation and should not
change throughout the life of the active design. Level assignments are also customizable;
however, they should be established before any components are placed in the model files.
5.1.6 Level and Symbology Defaults

The following outlines the delivered symbology schemes and describes how you can access
them for review and/or customization.
PDS 3D (Equipment, Piping, and Drawing)
Graphic symbology and level assignments are stored as Type 63 data in the project or
model seed files. Changes in project seed data will be reflected in all subsequent
models or drawings, while changes in a model or drawing files seed data will apply
only to that design file. The delivered settings are shown in Chapter 6 of the Project
Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide.
The seed data is accessed through the Project Data Manager function of the Project
Administrator. You can create a report of all Type 63 data at any time. Settings are
changed through a forms interface in the Project Data Manager session.
Structural (FrameWorks Plus)
The graphic symbology and level assignments are stored in an ASCII file in the
delivery directory of the FrameWorks Plus product, and are copied into the project
directory during project creation. There are both predefined and user-definable
categories (such as New and Existing).
148
The default data can be changed using a text editor such as Notepad. The saved
changes are then adapted into the model. The file used for FrameWorks Plus models is
framewks.txt
Electrical (EE Raceway)
The graphic symbology is delivered with all categories set to Level 1. This is the only
application within Process & Power which leaves symbology definition totally up to the
user, and it is required prior to accessing a design file.
The default data is defined through a forms interface during project setup. The
procedure is outlined in the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide.
PE-HVAC
Graphic symbology and level control is defined in an ASCII file named hvacSym.defe
in the project directory. The default data can be changed by editing the hvacSym.defe
and hvacSym.defm files in the project directory.
Models
5. Creating 3D
149
________________
5.2 Graphics Environment for PDS 3D

The PDS 3D products provide an interactive graphics environment (based on MicroStation)
for the creation and manipulation of design elments. Like the other modules of PDS these
graphics environments are accessed through PD_Shell. The following outlines the basic steps
to access the graphic environment for most PDS 3D products:
1. Select the project from the PD Shell form and select the product you wish to use.
2. Select the 3D design area for the model to be entered.
3. Select the model to be entered.
The system verifies that you have write access to the selected model. If so, it activates
the graphical user interface for the selected model file.
150
________________ Working with the Graphical User Interface
5.2.1 Working with the Graphical User Interface

The main method of communication between you and the software application is through the
graphical interface. This interface is organized into functional parts; menus, palettes, dialog
boxes, view windows, and command menus.
Menus
Menus are your main source of interaction with the software application. It is from menus
that you access all other pieces of the applications interface.
Models
5. Creating 3D
151
________________
Palettes
Palettes are icon-based menus that provide access to dialog boxes or commands. These
palettes are organized into functional parts of the software, with each part represented by an
icon on the main palette. An icon is a graphical depiction of a command name that appears on
a menu.
Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes are another type of menu available and represent the most detailed method of
interaction between you and the software.
152
Dialog boxes contain fields or boxes, menu bars, and buttons that help you to easily
communicate what you want to the software.
View Windows
Windows provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design. The number and
name of each view appears in the title bar.
Window Manipulation Buttons - provide ways to manipulate windows.
Control Menu Box - displays a list of window actions. Double-clicking on

this button deletes the window. To choose an action from the menu, drag
the data button to move the cursor through the list, releasing when the
correct item is selected.
Restore - restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous

size and location.
Move - moves a window around the workspace.
Size - changes the height and width of the window in the direction
indicated by the pointer.
Minimize - collapses a window down to its smallest size. Clicking on

this icon once the window has been collapsed will restore it to its
Models
5. Creating 3D
original size.
Maximize - enlarges a window to its maximum size. If you choose this

menu entry on a window that is already at its maximum size, the
window is restored to its previous size and location.
Lower - moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy.
153
________________
Close - deletes a window.
Minimize - collapses a window.
Maximize - enlarges a window to its maximum size. If you choose the

maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size, the
window is restored to its previous size and location.
Move Arrows - drag the data button on the title bar to move the window to
a new location on the screen.
Vertical Arrows - appear when the cursor is over the top or bottom of the
frame. Drag the data button to change the height of the window as you
move the cursor.
Horizontal Arrows - appear when the cursor is over the left or right side of
the frame. Drag the data button to change the width of the window as you
move the cursor.
Diagonal Arrows - appear when the cursor is over the frame corners. Click
and drag the data button to change both the height and width of the window
without changing the position of the opposite corner.
MicroStation Command Window

The MicroStation Command Window contains the following fields that display system
messages and your responses through keyboard input.
Control Menu Box - displays a list of window actions. Only the Lower and Sink actions are
available for the command window. To choose an action, drag the data button through the
list, releasing when the correct item is selected.
Sink Box - moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type.
Menu Bar - displays MicroStation pull-down menus. To choose an item from a list, drag the
data button through the list, releasing when the correct item is selected.
Status Field - displays status messages concerning the system, such as locks and selected
element information.
Command Field - displays the name of the current active command.
154
Key-In Field - accepts alphanumeric values and key-in commands.
Message Field - displays system messages and prompts.
Prompt Field - displays a system prompt that directs you through a command.
Error Field - displays system error messages.
Forms
Many PDS 3D commands activate forms. Forms are used for a variety of purposes within the
PDS environment. Most forms are activated when a command is selected and stay displayed
as long as that command is active. When the command terminates, the form is erased.
The Create Drawing form from the Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) product is shown below.
Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons, fields, text, and other gadgets. In
general, anything you find on a form is called a gadget.
Models
5. Creating 3D
Selecting Options
You move through the forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from the form.
Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screen gadget
and press <D>.
155
________________
For most of the forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept
the data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and
then selecting Confirm ().
You will use the select action to select functions, access other forms, activate data fields,
toggle buttons, select from lists, scroll through data displayed on the screen, and so on.
The following summarizes other basic actions you will use in the environments:
Return When keying in any data in a key-in field, press the <Return> key for the
data to be entered into the system. You can also press <Return> to move through a set
of key-in fields.
Delete If you make a mistake while keying in text, press the <Delete> key to erase
character(s) to the left of the cursor.
Windows Editing You can use standard Windows editing commands to edit key-in
fields.
156
5.2.2 Common Tools on Forms

There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms.
These tools and their functionality are described below.
The Help command activates on-line Help for the active form. Help remains active until you
delete the Help window.
The Cancel command is used to exit the active software, and return to the system prompt.
The Confirm () is used to accept a selection or operation. Depending on the active form or
option, the active form will remain active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control
returns to the preceding form.
The Reset command with the curved arrow abandons the current form, returning to the
immediately preceding form in the hierarchy.
Scrolling List
Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. You need to scroll a list
only if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. To scroll a list, select
the arrow buttons on the side of the list. The list scrolls up or down depending on which arrow
you choose. To scroll one line at a time, select the smaller arrows. To scroll one window at a
time, select the larger arrows.
You can also drag the slider up or down the bar by selecting it with the <D> button, keeping
the <D> button depressed, and moving the mouse up or down. The items scroll through the
window as you move the button. The size and position of the slider on the scroll bar is an
indication of the number of lines and the relative position within the list.
All commands which display a list of design areas or models will order the list
alphanumerically by the design area number or model number in ascending order.
Key-in Fields
Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. These fields are box-shaped and dark
gray. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. A bar cursor appears in the active
key-in field. Key in your input and press <Return>. To change a field, reselect the field and
key in the desired information. Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters
depending on the item being defined.
Models
5. Creating 3D
Key-in fields that appear on forms built with Form Builder accept EMACS editing
commands.
If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute, the system activates a form which list
the code list values for the selected field.
Microstation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of all
design files. Therefore, the system will automatically convert any input for the file
specification and path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before
loading into the Project Control Database.
157
________________
Display-list Boxes
A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields and lets you select data from a
list instead of keying in information. For example, there is a display list associated with the
Authorization key-in field shown. At the end of the field, there is a small box with horizontal
dashes. When you select this display list box with the screen cursor, an associated list of valid
input values displays. Select the desired item from the list to input its value into the field.
Shift Left and Shift Right buttons
At the bottom of some key-in and display fields, there are two buttons marked with arrows.
These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons.
Often, you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Shift Left moves the text
display to the front of field; Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field.
Toggle
A toggle field on a screen menu is used to select one of two possible choices, one of which is
always displayed. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the two choices.
Roll-Through List
A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long. Place a
data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. The option
displayed is active.
Standard Window Icons
If you press <D> along the edge of a form or any area not occupied by a button, key-in field,
or other gadget, the box of icons shown at right displays. You can manipulate form windows
just like any other workstation window.
The following list defines in order the available window icons.
Collapse/Restore Pop-to-bottom Pop-to-top

Repaint Modify/Resize Restore Size
5.2.2.1 Base Form

When you enter the graphics environment, the system displays the base form. This form
indicates the product creation date, software version number, active project number, and the
active model number.
158
You can also use this form to define the location on the screen to display all of the Piping
Design forms.
To revise the location of the form display,
Cancel any other forms. The base form should be the only form displayed.
Move the form to the desired location.
Select the File Design command to save the active form location. All subsequent forms
will display in the saved location.
Models
5. Creating 3D
159
________________
5.2.3 3D Seed Data

You can use the Project Data Manager to modify seed information for the project seed files
or for a specified model. These options affect all of the project seed files and the project
marker file.
Select the option for the type of 3D data to be revised. The following report shows the
delivered seetings for the 3D data.
Plant Coordinate System Definition
Plant Coordinate System Description : Plant Coordinate System
Plant Coordinate System Monument :

Easting : E 0 0" Plant
Northing : N 0 0" Plant
Elevation : El 0 0" Plant
Design Volume Coordinate System Definition
Design Volume Coordinate System Description : Design Volume Coordinate System
Design Volume Coordinate System Monument :

Monument in Design Volume Coordinate System :
Design Volume Monument in Plant Coordinate System :
160
________________ 3D Seed Data
Orientation of Design Volume Coordinate: East
Orientation of Design Volume Coordinate System as clockwise Angular

Offset of Design Volume North from Plant North : 0.000000
Coordinate Label/Readout Descriptions
Coordinate System Label :

Design Volume : Site
Plant : Plant
World : World
Coordinate System Readout :

Design Volume :
Plant : Plant
World : World
Coordinate Axis Label :

East : East
West : West
North : North
South : South
Elevation : Elev
Coordinate Axis Readout :

East : E
West : W
North : N
South : S
Elevation : El
Dimensioning : English
Coordinate Label Prefix/Suffix
Match Line : Match Line

Center Line : CL
Top Of Steel : TOS
Top of Concrete : TOC
Battery Limit : Battery Limit
Bottom of Pipe : BOP
Invert Elevation : Invert
Platform Elevation :
Face of Flange : F/F
User Define 1 :
User Define 2 :
User Define 3 :
User Define 4 :
User Define 5 :
User Define 6 :
Models
5. Creating 3D
User Define 7 :
User Define 8 :
User Define 9 :
User Define 10 :
User Define 11 :
User Define 12 :
User Define 13 :
User Define 14 :
User Define 15 :
User Define 16 :
User Define 17 :
User Define 18 :
161
________________
User Define 19 :
User Define 20 :
Coordinate Label/Readout Format
Coordinate Label Formats :

10 East Plant
10 Plant East
East 10 Plant (Active)
East Plant 10
Plant 10 East
Plant East 10
Label Description On
Coordinate Readout :
10 E Plant
10 Plant E
E 10 Plant (Active)
E Plant 10
Plant 10 E
Plant E 10
Readout Description On
Coordinate Label/Readout Units
Label Units : Master Units and Subunits
Readout Units : Master Units and Subunits
Metric System of Units Label : Subunits Only
Label Descritions :
Master Units Short Description :
Subunits Short Description : "
Master Units and Subunits Separator :
Subunits and Fraction of Subunits Separator :
Readout Descriptions :
Master Units Short Description :
Subunits Short Description : "
Secondary Units Descriptions :

Master Units Short Description : M
Subunits Short Description : MM
Coordinate Label/Readout Precision
Label Precision : Decimal to nearest 1/32
Label Alphanumeric Fraction
Readout Precision : Decimal to nearest 1/32
162
________________ 3D Seed Data
Secondary Precision : Decimal to nearest integer
Coordinate Label Symbology
Weight :
Coordinate Labels : 1
Witness Line and Terminator : 1
Color :
Coordinate Labels : Orange
Witness Line and Terminator : Orange
Text Font :
Coordinate Labels : 23
Witness Line and Terminator : 125
Symbol for Line Terminator : 42
Plot Gap Size : 0.250000
Line Spacing : 0
Angular Label/Readout
Angular Label Decimal Degrees Accuracy : 1 Decimal Place
Angular Readout Decimal Degrees Accuracy : 1 Decimal Place
Angular Input is Clockwise from North
Slope Readout Accuracy : Number of Inches per Foot
Models
5. Creating 3D
163
________________
5.3 Creating Equipment Models

The PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) product models equipment and equipment items
for later connection to PDS piping components created through the Piping Designer software.
The Equipment Modeling product defines equipment volumes and positions nozzles on the
equipment.
5.3.1 Functions of PDS Equipment Modeling

(PD_EQP)
With PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP), you can perform the following tasks:
Place basic three-dimensional building blocks such as cylinders, cones and boxes called
primitives.
Place three-dimensional equipment and components called parametrics, which are

predefined and delivered in a library with the product.
Create complex parametrics using the EDEN language and add them to the Reference
Database for future placement. Refer to the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide for
details.
Primitive Parametric
164
________________ Creating Equipment Models
5.3.2 About the Reference Database (RDB)

The following libraries comprise the RDB and are used to define the equipment and make it
compatible with exisiting piping specs:
Graphic Commodity Library
Tutorial Definition Library
Piping Physical Data Library
Piping Design Standard Note Library
Piping Specification Tables Library.
5.3.3 Equipment Model Seed Data

The Project Data Manager is used to revise the seed data for a specified Equipment model or
create a report of the RDB data. You can revise both 3D data and model data. The Revise
Equipment Data option is used to revise the model data for the selected equipment model
file. The system activates the following form which provides access to the modification
options.
Models
5. Creating 3D
Select the option for the type of model data to be revised. The following report shows the
delivered settings for the Equipment Model Data.
165
________________
Project Data Manager
Equipment Graphic Symbology
Primitives/Parametrics
Category Level Color Weight Symbology
Physical 10 9 2 Solid
Eqp Category 2 1 White 0 Solid
Nozzles
Nozzle Category Small 12 9 3 Solid

Nozzle Category Medium 12 9 3 Solid
Nozzle Category Large 12 9 3 Solid
Envelopes
Maintanence Envelope (Hard) 40 8 1 Solid

Maintanence Envelope (Soft) 41 8 0 Solid
Access Envelope (Hard) 42 10 1 Solid
Access Envelope (Soft) 43 10 0 Solid
Safety Envelope (Hard) 44 11 1 Solid
Safety Envelope (Soft) 45 11 0 Solid
Construction Envelope (Hard) 46 12 1 Solid
Construction Envelope (Soft) 47 12 0 Solid
Equipment Graphic Symbology (continued)
Steel
Ladders 20 White 1 Solid

Platforms 21 White 1 Solid
Handrails 22 White 1 Solid
Miscellaneous Light Steel 23 White 1 Solid
166
________________ Creating Equipment Models
Dumb Graphics
Dumb Category 1 30 White 0 Solid

Miscellaneous
Place Point 48 15 8 Solid

Datum Point 50 13 10 Solid
Hole Elements 15 White 0 Solid
2-D Shadows 12 9 3 Solid
Semi Intelligent Graphics
Semi-Intelligent Category 1 51 White 0 Solid

Semi-Ingelligent Category 2 52 White 0 Solid
Nozzle Default Placement Options
Nominal Piping Diameter
System of Units : English
Small is <= : 2IN

Large is >= : 14IN
Models
5. Creating 3D
Table Name : D036
Define Table Suffix by End Type : Bolted - 5

Female - 5
Male - 5
Equipment Reference Database Management
167
________________

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdeqp/dat/ zi_eqpms.lib
Tutorial Definition Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdeqp/dat/ zi_tutlib.lib
Equipment Physical Data Library

Approved :
Piping Physical Data Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_pcdim.l
Piping Design Standard Note Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdshell/lib/ std_note.l
Piping Job Specification Table Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_pjstb.l
Cell library
Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdeqp/dat/ equip.cel
Forms Directory Location

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdeqp/
Interference Envelope Emulation Data
Distance Between Two Planes for Clash Checking : 1"

Number of Emulated Cylinders Per 90 Degree Torus : 4
Length of Emulated Cylinders for Cone : 1"
Length of Emulated Cylinders for Semi-Ellipsoid : 1"
168
________________ Equipment Modeling Environment
5.3.4 Equipment Modeling Environment

The Equipment Modeling Interface is accessed through PD_Shell. This interface allows you
to enter the Equipment Modeling graphics environment, create or modify Eden and Tutorial
Definition files, print reports and define or edit filenames and locations for libraries.
Operating Sequence
1. At the Plant Design System form, select the Equipment Modeling option.
The system displays the Equipment Modeling Options form.
2. Select the Equipment Modeling option to enter the graphics environment.
The system displays the Equipment Modeling form listing the available design area
numbers and their corresponding descriptions.
Models
5. Creating 3D
169
________________
3. Select Design Area
Select the 3D design area to modify and click Confirm.
The system lists the equipment models for the selected design area and their
corresponding descriptions.
4. Select Model
Select the Model Number to modify and click Confirm.
The system enters the graphics design file.
170
________________ Equipment Modeling Concepts
5.3.5 Equipment Modeling Concepts

You can orient equipment items in a 3D design file using the refresh (orientation) tee and the
coordinate axis system. The refresh tee provides you with both the active point location and
the active orientation. The active point displays where the graphics will be placed while the
active orientation displays the graphics orientation.
The term refresh denotes graphics which are temporarily drawn on the screen and can be
moved dynamically. The refresh tee appears at the active place point when selecting
placement commands. It consists of two lines.
The primary axis originates at the active place point and is aligned with the equipment
item center line.
The secondary axis is aligned perpendicular to the primary axis with its origin at the
bisecting point with the primary axis. This axis is used to define the auxiliary
orientation.
When placing an equipment item with the refresh tee, you can adjust the orientation by one of
the following methods:
Selecting the reset button (<R>) to adjust the orientation 90 around the active axis.
Keying in a specific angle.
Using the Refresh Manipulation commands via the coordinate axis system.
The coordinate axis system display consists of a refresh line originating at the active place
Models
5. Creating 3D
point and pointing in one of six coordinate directions: North, East, Up, South, West and
Down.
171
________________
If the coordinate axis system display is turned on, the refresh tee appears at the active place
point when you select a secondary command such as Absolute PDS XYZ or Delta PDS
XYZ.
You can confirm the direction of the active axis by viewing the status field. The system
displays the directional information using a few simple symbols.
**P-IN S-
P - primary axis
S - secondary axis
** - indicating the active axis
-IN or - indicating the direction the active axis is pointing depending on the active view.
-OUT In a specified view (other than Iso), IN points away from you when looking at a
model. OUT points toward you when looking at a model. For example when
looking at a north view, IN points north (away from you) and OUT points south
(toward you).
In the example above, the primary axis is the active axis and points IN toward the displayed
view. The secondary axis is only visible in the displayed view. Since the primary axis is
active, it can be rotated by a Refresh Manipulation command.
The refresh tee cannot be displayed on a screen if it is located outside of the

screen view.
Also, a 3D representation of the orientation axes with their center located on the placement
point appears in place of the orientation tee previous to its displacement. This axis is called
the Coordinate Axis or the Coordinate System Indicator (CSI).
172
________________ Equipment Modeling Concepts
5.3.6 Activating the Orientation Tee

When activating the orientation tee, the system displays the coordinate axis in its place
previous to its displacement. The orientation tee can be manipulated only in the following
instances:
It can be manipulated when the active point is defined using the ACTIVE POINT
command. After selecting this command, you can use any of the pocket menu options
to manipulate the tee. Angles of rotation cannot be entered with this command.
When placing equipment and components using a form or a parametric tutorial for
equipment or component generation and manipulation. Angles of rotation can be keyed
in, where positive angles are measured in the counterclockwise direction looking from
the direction where the non-rotating axis is pointing. To change the axis to be rotated,
select the CHANGE AXIS option.
When an equipment or component manipulation command (Move, Copy, Rotate,

Mirror, etc.) is active. Angles of rotation for primary or secondary axis cannot be
entered in this mode. Models
5. Creating 3D
173
________________
5.4 Equipment Modeling Commands

This section lists the Equipment Modeling commands that are available.
5.4.1 Equipment Manipulation Commands

These commands allow you to create, copy, move, delete, rotate and mirror entire pieces of
equipment defined either individually or by a fence. You can create equipment using user
defined primitives or parametrics.
5.4.2 Component Manipulation Commands

These commands allow you to add components or equipment items to existing pieces of
equipment and also copy, move, delete, rotate, mirror, and modify equipment items.
5.4.3 Nozzle Manipulation

This command allows you to place nozzles in reference to a datum point or another nozzle.
The new nozzle will be added to the same equipment tag owning the referenced datum point
or nozzle.
5.4.4 Review/Revise Commands

These commands allow you to view or revise data associated with the current project or
drawing. This data includes project file data and equipment attributes.
5.4.5 Define Commands

These commands allow you to define the active placement point, the view orientation, and
display categories.
5.4.6 Miscellaneous Commands

These commands perform a variety of manipulations including envelope file generation,
datum point manipulation, dimension checking, viewing specific equipment groups, attaching
graphics, controlling display categories, reviewing error messages, attaching reference
models, and defining saved views.
174
________________ Equipment Modeling Commands
5.4.7 Secondary Commands

These commands provide support for the primary commands. A Secondary Command will
not function unless a primary command is active. These commands are used to orient the
screen views, defines precision input, adjust the orientation of the refresh tee, or define the
coordinate system.
Models
5. Creating 3D
175
________________
5.5 Creating Piping Models

The Piping Designer (PD_Design) is one module of PDS 3D products. It is specifically
intended for the creation and revision of 3D models in the design of the piping and in-line
instrumentation within the plant. The resulting piping models can be used for checking
interferences, extracting drawings, and generating bills of material.
The following illustration shows a typical piping model with reference models attached. The
piping model contains fully dimensioned graphics for piping, piping components, instruments,
piping specialties, and pipe supports. You can access coordinate points from the reference
models and review database attributes.
Piping Model With Attached Reference Models
176
________________ Creating Piping Models
Each component in a piping model is linked to a database record which contains non-graphic
information about the component. When a component or segment is placed in the model, the
system creates a row in the appropriate database table(s). A row represents one instance or
record in the database.
Database Attributes Associated with Graphics
Models
5. Creating 3D
177
________________
5.5.1 Piping Model Seed Data

The Revise Model Data option is used to revise the Model data in the project seed file or a
specific piping model. The system activates the following form which enables you to access
the modification options.
Select the option for the type of model data to be revised. The following report shows the
delivered settings for the Piping Model Data.
Component Placement
Bend Deflection Table : BEND_DEFLECTION
Commodity Name Table : COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME
Pipe Length Threshold Table : PIPE_LENGTH
Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table : PIPE_RUN_LENGTH
Weld Type Table : WELD_TYPE_TABLE
Flange Data Module :
Reinforcing Weld Data Module :
Reinforcing Pad Data Module :
Pipe Commodity Name : PIPING
Tube Commodity Name : TUBE
Field Weld Symbol Name :
178
________________ Piping Model Seed Data
Isometric Drawing Symbol Name :
Angular Tolerance (Automated Component) : 0.500000
Vicinity Tolerance : 4.000000
Piping Data Control
P&ID Component Name : Commodity Name
Fluid Code Update : Off
Weight Table : On
Branch Component Association for Isometric Drawings : Header
Copy Option : Append Prefix
Geometric Industry Standard : Expanded
Schedule Thickness Override Option : Larger of Override and Spec
System of Units for Nominal Piping Diameter : English
Field Name for Nominal Piping Diameter : IN
Physical Units Options
Insulation Density : lb/ft3
Surface Area : ft2
Dry/Wet Weights : lb
Maximum Temperature (Spec) : degF
Nozzle Data Transfer List
There are currently NO nozzle attributes selected for transfer

Graphic Symbology
Weights :
Piping Commodity : 2
Piping Specialty : 2
Instrument : 2
Models
5. Creating 3D
Piping/Tubing : 2
Pipe Support : 2
Model Symbology : Simple
Color : Model Category
Graphic Symbology - Model Category
179
________________
Nominal Piping Diameter :

Small is <= 2IN
Large is >= 14IN
Level Color
Piping Segment Not Approved Small 1 Blue
Piping Segment Not Approved Medium 11 Blue
Piping Segment Not Approved Large 21 Blue
Piping Segment Approved Small 31 Blue
Piping Segment Approved Medium 41 Blue
Piping Segment Approved Large 51 Blue
Piping/Tubing Not Approved Small 3 Green
Piping/Tubing Not Approved Medium 13 Green
Piping/Tubing Not Approved Large 23 Green
Piping/Tubing Approved Small 33 Green
Piping/Tubing Approved Medium 43 Green
Piping/Tubing Approved Large 53 Green
Piping Commodity Not Approved Small 2 Green
Piping Commodity Not Approved Medium 12 Green
Piping Commodity Not Approved Large 22 Green
Piping Commodity Approved Small 32 Green
Piping Commodity Approved Medium 42 Green
Piping Commodity Approved Large 52 Green
Piping Specialty Not Approved Small 4 Orange
Piping Specialty Not Approved Medium 14 Orange
Piping Specialty Not Approved Large 24 Orange
Piping Specialty Approved Small 34 Orange
Piping Specialty Approved Medium 44 Orange
Piping Specialty Approved Large 54 Orange
Instrument Not Approved Small 5 Orange
Instrument Not Approved Medium 15 Orange
Instrument Not Approved Large 25 Orange
Instrument Approved Small 35 Orange
Instrument Approved Medium 45 Orange
Instrument Approved Large 55 Orange
Pipe Support - Logical Not Approved N/A 7 Violet
Pipe Support - Physical Not Approved N/A 10 White
Pipe Support - Logical Approved N/A 37 Violet
Pipe Support - Physical Approved N/A 40 White
Miscellaneous Graphics 58 Red
Diagnostic Markers 59 Red
Automated Component/Pipe Placement Markers 62 Red
Model Reconstruction Markers 63 Red
Symbology for Markers
Weights :
Diagnostic Markers : 2
Design Check Markers : 2
Automated Placement Markers : 2
Model Reconstruction Markers : 2
Field Weld and Isometric Drawing Symbol : 2
Symbol Font Number : 125
Text Height : 6"
Text Width : 6"
Field Weld Symbol Name :
Isometric Drawing Symbol Name :

Material Takeoff Options
180
Commodity Code : Size Independent
Length Calculation : Almost Precise
Bolt Commodity Code : Piping Job Spec
Bolt Diameter Units : English
Bolt Length Units : English
Bolt Roundoff Option : Preferred Bolt Length Table
Alternate Gasket Search : Off
Field Fit Length : Off
Gasket Commodity Name : 6Q3C95

Bolt Commodity Name : 6Q3C97
Nut Commodity Name : 6Q3C98
Bolt Data Module : BOLT_DATA

Flange Data Module : FLANGE_DATA_MTO
Bolt Length Table : BOLT_LENGTH
Design Review Label Option
Selected Labels :
There are NO Design Review Labels Selected
Default Segment Parameters
unit_number
fluid_code Standard Note Number is Undefined <125,0>
unit_code
line_sequence_no
nominal_piping_dia 100-3/4IN
piping_mater_class
insulation_purpose Standard Note Number is Undefined <220,0>
insulation_thick 0 0"
nor_oper_pres 0.000
nor_op_pres_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1064,0>
nor_oper_temp 0.000
nor_op_temp_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1056,0>
nor_dgn_pres 0.000
nor_dgn_pres_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1064,0>
nor_dgn_temp 0.000
nor_dgn_temp_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1056,0>
insulation_density 0 lb/ft3
heat_tracing_reqmt Standard Note Number is Undefined <200,0>
heat_tracing_media Standard Note Number is Undefined <210,0>
heat_tracing_temp 0 degF
design_resp Standard Note Number is Undefined <160,0>
Models
5. Creating 3D
supply_resp Standard Note Number is Undefined <160,0>
construction_resp Standard Note Number is Undefined <160,0>
construction_stat Standard Note Number is Undefined <130,0>
hold_status Standard Note Number is Undefined <50,0>
design_area_number
alt_oper_pres 0.000
alt_op_pres_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1064,0>
alt_oper_temp 0.000
alt_op_temp_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1056,0>
alt_dgn_pres 0.000
alt_dgn_pres_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1064,0>
alt_dgn_temp 0.000
alt_dgn_temp_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1056,0>
181
________________
steam_outlet_temp 0.000
steam_temp_units Standard Note Number is Undefined <1056,0>
train_number
mater_of_construct
safety_class Standard Note Number is Undefined <340,0>
design_standard Standard Note Number is Undefined <570,0>
fluid_category
coating_reqmts Standard Note Number is Undefined <190,0>
cleaning_reqmts Standard Note Number is Undefined <230,0>
package_system_no
Default Segment Parameters (continued)
module_no
specific_gravity_a 0.000
specific_gravity_b 0.000
specific_gravity_c 0.000
viscosity 0.000
density 0.000
spec_heat_ratio 0.000
sonic_velocity 0.000
surface_roughness 0.000
test_system_no
test_fluid Standard Note Number is Undefined <125,0>
test_pressure 0.000
schedule_override
Design Consistency Checks
Data :
Flow Direction : Hard Check
Flow Centerline : Hard Check
Outside Diameter : No Check
Schedule/Thickness : No Check
Piping Materials Class : Soft Check
Materials of Construction Class : Soft Check
Insulation Thickness : Soft Check
Insulation Purpose : Soft Check
Tolerances :
Flow Centerline Alighment : 0.500000
Insulation Thickness : 1/4"
End Prep Compatibilities
Bolted End Preps
FFFE -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG FFTBCSE FFTBCSEWG FFFTBE FFFTBEWG
FFFEWG -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG FFTBCSE FFTBCSEWG FFFTBE FFFTBEWG
RFFE -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG RFTBCSE RFTBCSEWG
RFFEWG -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG RFTBCSE RFTBCSEWG
RJFE -
RJFE RJLFE RJTBE MRJTBEWG RJTBCSE
182
STFE -
SGFE SGLFE
LTFE -
LGFE LGLFE
SMFE -
SFFE SFLFE
LMFE -
LFFE LFLFE
SGFE -
STFE STLFE
LGFE -
LTFE LTLFE
SFFE -
SMFE SMLFE
LFFE -
LMFE LMLFE
FFLFE -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG
RFLFE -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG
RJLFE -
RJFE RJLFE RJTBE MRJTBEWG
STLFE -
SGFE SGLFE
LTLFE -
LGFE LGLFE
SMLFE -
SFFE SFLFE
LMLFE -
LFFE LFLFE
SGLFE -
STFE STLFE
Bolted End Preps
LGLFE -
LTFE LTLFE FFTBCSEWG
Models
5. Creating 3D
SFLFE -
SMFE SMLFE
LFLFE -
LMFE LMLFE
FFTBE -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG FFTBCSE
FFTBEWG -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG FFTBCSEWG
183
________________
RFTBE -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG RFTBCSE
RFTBEWG -
FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG FFLFE RFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG RFTBCSEWG
RJTBE -
RJFE RJLFE RJTBE MRJTBEWG RJTBCSE
MRJTBEWG -
RJFE RJLFE RJTBE
FFTBCSE -
FFFE FFFEWG FFTBE
FFTBCSEWG -
FFFE FFFEWG LGLFE FFTBEWG
RFTBCSE -
RFFE RFFEWG RFTBE
RFTBCSEWG -
RFFE RFFEWG RFTBEWG
RJTBCSE -
RJFE RJTBE
FFFTBE -
FFFE FFFEWG FFFTBE
FFFTBEWG -
FFFE FFFEWG FFFTBEWG
MJE -
MJE
Male End Preps
BE -
BE TBE PE SE SWE HCE
TBE -
BE TBE PE SWE HCE
MFE -
MFE
MTE -
FTE
MGE -
FGE
MQCE -
FQCE
MFRE -
FFRE
MHE -
FHE
SPE -
BLE
184
PE -
BE TBE PE SE SWE FTE HCE
3"FFPE -
HCE
Female End Preps
SE -
BE PE
SWE -
BE TBE PE
FTE -
MTE PE
FGE -
MGE
FQCE -
MQCE
FFRE -
MFRE
FHE -
MHE
BLE -
SPE
HCE -
BE TBE PE 3"FFPE

Reference Database Management
Material/Specification Reference Database

Approved : ra_tcproj
Piping Job Specification Table Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_pjstb.l
Short Material Description Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_shbom.l
Long Material Description Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_lgbom.l
Specialty Material Description Library

Models
5. Creating 3D
Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_spbom.l
Standard Note Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdshell/lib/ std_note.l
Label Description Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdshell/lib/ labels.l
Piping Assembly Library

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdshell/lib/ assembly.l
185
________________

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/pdshell/lib/ pip_gcom.l
Physical Data Library - U.S. Practice

Approved : wegl /usr/ip32/rdusrdb/ us_pcdim.l
Physical Data Library - DIN

Approved :
Physical Data Library - British Standard

Approved :
Physical Data Library - European A

Approved :
Physical Data Library - European B

Approved :
Physical Data Library - JIS

Approved :
Physical Data Library - Australian

Approved :
Physical Data Library - International A

Approved :
Physical Data Library - International B

Approved :
186
________________ Graphic Concepts for Piping Design
5.5.2 Graphic Concepts for Piping Design

The screen working area is used to display and manipulate graphic information. This
information is managed by MicroStation; refer to the MicroStation documentation for details.
Refresh graphics are graphics which are temporarily drawn on the screen. Piping Designer
uses refresh graphics to display placement aids such as the orientation tee and coordinate
system indicator.
Graphics are frequently highlighted to provide visual feedback pertaining to the active input.
Highlighting is normally followed by an Accept/Reject step allowing you to accept the
highlighted graphics as the desired input or to reject the highlighted graphics and select
another graphic.
This following concepts and terms are common to the Piping Designer operations.
5.5.2.1 Piping Segments

The centerline routing within a model is represented by geographically connected piping
segments. A piping segment defines the geometry of the pipeline and contains the non-
graphical data associated with that pipeline. A single piping segment can define changes of
direction, but an additional segment is created at a branch point or an attribute break, such as a
size change or a spec break.
The following illustrates the terminology associated with a piping segment.
Models
5. Creating 3D
A pipeline consists of a set of graphically connected piping segments including all the
branches.
187
________________
5.5.2.2 Active Placement Point

The term active placement point refers to the coordinate location used by the Place
Component command. It defines the point at which piping and instrumentation are placed.
You can use Connect to Design to place a piping or instrument component at an existing,
intelligent location in the model, such as a piping or instrumentation connect point, a nozzle,
or a piping segment.
The system uses the orientation tee to indicate the location of the Active Placement Point.
5.5.2.3 Coordinate System Indicator and Orientation Tee
Coordinate System Indicator

The coordinate system indicator is a temporary display symbol which represents the six
orthogonal directions (North, South, East, West, Up, and Down) of the coordinate system.
Piping Designer uses the coordinate system indicator to indicate the active coordinate
location when
defining or manipulating a piping segment
identifying a point on a piping segment
identifying a component center or connect point
188
________________ Graphic Concepts for Piping Design
sketching a pipeline.
5.5.3 Orientation Tee

The orientation tee is a temporary display symbol which enables you to orient a component
before placement. The orientation tee is composed of two lines:
a primary axis representing the flow centerline
a secondary axis used to orient components which are not symmetrical about the flow
centerline (for example, a valve with an operator).
When the Place Component command is active, the system displays the orientation tee at the
Active Placement Point and displays related information in the screen message fields.
P **S-OUT
The stars (**) indicate the active axis of rotation (the secondary in the above message). When
either axis is rotated such that its orientation is not in the plane of the view, the suffix IN or
OUT is displayed next to P (primary) or S (secondary) indicating whether that axis is pointing
in or out of that view. For example, when the secondary axis is perpendicular to the screen
and oriented toward the designer, the message P S-OUT is displayed.
When placing a component with the orientation tee, you can adjust the orientation by pressing
<R> or selecting one of the Orientation Control commands.
Models
5. Creating 3D
189
________________
5.5.3.1 Piping Connect Points

Each component has a center and at least one connect point or pressurized end. A connect
point is usually an end of a piping component to which another component or pipe (with
compatible properties) is connected. The connect point stores the description of the
component at that end. It indicates the flow centerline orientation, and properties such as
diameter, end preparation (flanged, welded,...), and rating.
The following rules (in order of priority) are used to determine the assignment of connect
point numbers:
1. Connect Point 1 is always at the larger end (NPD).
2. If the ends have the same NPD, but different end preparations, then Connect Point 1 is
assigned an end preparation in the following precedence: Bolted, Male, Female.
Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailed explanation of
connect point assignments.
190
________________ Piping Design Commands
5.6 Piping Design Commands

The following Piping Design commands are available..pE
5.6.1 Placement Commands

Placement commands enable you to place pipe, piping components, pipe supports, and
instrument components. You can also place assemblies (predefined sets of components).
These commands can be used at any time in the design process. In the process of creating a
piping model you will use a combination of these commands depending on the desired result.
A typical approach is to use
Sketch to route the layout of a pipeline and define the attribute data for the pipeline.
The attribute data can be defined manually, copied from another segment, or updated
from information in the P&ID database.
Place Component to place components such as valves, instruments, or commodity

overrides along the segment pipeline.
Automated Placement to populate the pipeline with fittings and pipe.
The Copy Piping, Copy and Mirror Piping, and Copy and Rotate Piping commands
automatically change the approval status of piping segments and piping components to not
approved during the copy operation.
You cannot make any of the following changes to approved piping.
Create a new piping segment in the Sketch command by connecting to previously

placed, approved piping.
Place new piping components, instrument components, piping, or tubing in the Place
Component command by connecting to previously placed, approved piping.
Place new pipe supports in the Place Pipe Support command by connecting to
previously placed, approved piping.
Place new pipe supports in the Place Logical Support command by connecting to
previously placed, approved piping.
Models
5. Creating 3D
191
________________
5.6.2 Revision Commands

The Revision commands enable you to move, delete, and rotate existing piping. You can
revise individual components, piping segments, or all the elments on a pipeline or defined by
a group operation.
These commands can be used at any time in the design process to move, modify, or delete a
component, a piping segment, or a group of elments such as a pipeline.
Any rotation, addition, reconstruction, or deletion of PDS piping components and segments
must be done through these commands and not through MicroStation manipulations due to the
interdependence of graphic and database information.
5.6.3 Component Revision

These commands revise/append different positional and/or database information on PDS
piping components. Any rotation, addition, or reconstruction of PDS piping components must
be done through these commands and not through MicroStation manipulations due to the
interdependence of graphic and database information. You cannot use MicroStation
commands to change piping as they will not update the user data associated with the piping
segment or component.
5.6.4 Segment Vertex Commands

These commands enable you to revise piping segments in the active model. You can add,
move, or delete an imbedded vertex for an existing piping segment. These command cannot
be used if the segment has been populated with pipes or components.
5.6.5 Piping Revision

These commands enable you to move, delete, rotate, and reconstruct existing piping. You can
revise a pipeline or those elements defined by an active group. The commands perform both
graphical and database revisions.
192
________________ Piping Design Commands
5.6.6 Model Data

These commands enable you to review or revise the model data stored in the Design Database
and Project Control Database. Each component in a piping model is linked to a database
record which contains non-graphic information about the component. When a component or
segment is placed in the model, the system creates a row in the appropriate database table.
These commands can be used at any time in the design process to review or revise the model
data stored in the Design Database.
5.6.7 Review Data

These commands enable you to review information in the Design Database or review existing
report files. You can only view the information you cannot make any changes. You can
reveiw data for elements in the active model and attached reference models.
5.6.8 Revise Data

These commands enable you to revise information in the Design Database and define
additional information for components. You can only revise information for items in the
active model.
5.6.9 Analyze Data

These commands enable you to review information related to the model analysis operations.
You can also check for interferences within the active model file. Many of these command
are dependent on data from the Design Data Management commands.
Refer to the Chapter on Interference Detection for more information on detecting and
reviewing interference clashes.
Models
5. Creating 3D
193
________________
194
________________ P&ID to Piping Data Transfer
6. P&ID to Piping Data Transfer

PDS provides cababilities for distributing data from one part of the design process to another.
One aspect of this integration is the transfer and comparison of data between the P&ID task
and the Piping task. This section describes the conventions that apply to the loading,
updating, and comparison of data between the P&ID Database and the piping model.
Features
Update segment data. You can transfer segment data from the P&ID to update the
active segment data, to define line attributes while sketching, or to revise a segment
attribute or set of attributes.
Review component names. You can select a component on the P&ID to define the
commodity item to be placed.
Compare data. You can compare data in the model against data in the P&ID to verify
that all the information is in agreement.
Graphical interface. The easiest way to transfer or review data is to use the graphical
data transfer options. This allows you to display the P&ID drawing in a view while
working in the model and select items directly from the drawing graphics.
PDS also supports transfer by line ID or by identifying an equipment nozzle as the start
of a pipeline.
6.1 Database Requirements

For the P&ID Database to be linked to the Piping Design Database, the two applications must
share the same Project Control Database schema. This can be achieved by using the same
project number when creating the schematic project and the 3D project. Although the Project
Control Database schema must be shared, the P&ID Database schema and the Piping Design
Database schema are otherwise independent.
Unit Number
The unit number attribute is used to locate the relevant P&ID data within the P&ID Task and
Master Database. The unti number should be set in the active segment data to match the Unit
Number setting within the P&ID database.
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
195
________________
Propogated Drawings
Only those P&ID drawings which have been successfully propogated can be referenced for
P&ID to Piping data transfer.
196
________________ P&ID Correlation Table
6.2 P&ID Correlation Table

The P&ID Correlation Table is an ASCII file used to correlate a particular column or columns
in the P&ID segment table of the P&ID Database with a corresponding column in the piping
segment table of the Piping Design Database.
The P&ID Correlation Table defines which database columns are to be transferred and
compared.
Any columns not specified in the Correlation Table will not be transferred.
The P&ID column numbers required in the Correlation table are from the relational database
and are not the P&ID attribute numbers.
During the interactive loading of segment data, you can specify that either a complete or
partial set of data be considered. The Correlation Table specifies which columns are to be
loaded, updated, or compared for both complete and partial data transfer.
The Correlation Table is expected to exist in the project directory for the applicable project,
(the directory that includes the seed model, seed drawings, etc.) A default Correlation Table
is delivered in the PD_Shell product and is automatically copied to the project directory when
a new project is created. You can edit the Correlation Table, if required, to add columns to or
delete columns from both the complete and partial data transfer processes. An asterisk (*)
signifies that data transfer and comparison is applicable for that particular column. You can
also add user-defined columns of piping segment data to the Correlation Table.
The default Correlation Table is defined as follows:
# Segment Data Model P&ID Complete Partial

#If you desire to default the non-partial attributes during a partial transfer of
#data, in the partial column place a -, skip at least one space, and define the
#default value. The default value will be used whenever an interactive transfer
#occurs, or if the toggle is set for the batch update. The complete,
#partial and default values are supported ONLY in this section of the file.
#example: attribute_one 99 100 * - default_value
unit_number 4 13
unit_code 5 2 * *
module_no 6 79 *
package_system_no 7 81 *
train_number 8 23 * *
fluid_code 9 22 * *
line_sequence_no 10 24 * *
nominal_piping_dia 11 15 *
npd_units -1 16
piping_mater_class 12 25 * *
insulation_purpose 14 26 * *
insulation_thick 15 28 *
insulation_thick_units -1 29
insulation_density 16 30 * *
insulation_density_units -1 31
heat_tracing_reqmt 17 73 * *
heat_tracing_media 18 74 * *
heat_tracing_temp 19 75 * *
heat_tracing_temp_units -1 76
construction_stat 20 60 * *
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
197
________________
hold_status 21 83 * *
schedule_override 23 66 *
nor_oper_pres 24 39 *
nor_oper_temp 25 41 *
alt_oper_pres 26 43 *
alt_oper_temp 27 45 *
nor_dgn_pres 28 47 *
nor_dgn_temp 29 49 *
alt_dgn_pres 30 51 *
alt_dgn_temp 31 53 *
steam_outlet_temp 32 86 *
mater_of_construct 33 61 *
safety_class 34 59 *
design_resp 37 69 *
construction_resp 38 78 *
supply_resp 39 71 *
coating_reqmts 40 72 *
cleaning_reqmts 41 77 *
fluid_category 42 84 *
nor_op_pres_units 43 40 *
nor_op_temp_units 44 42 *
alt_op_pres_units 45 44 *
alt_op_temp_units 46 46 *
nor_dgn_pres_units 47 48 *
nor_dgn_temp_units 48 50 *
alt_dgn_pres_units 49 52 *
alt_dgn_temp_units 50 54 *
steam_temp_units 51 87 *
test_system_no 64 55 *
test_fluid 65 56 *
test_pressure 66 57 *
### Data extracted from the Piping Segment Table ( piping_seg, 112 ) of the P&ID Design Database:
# upstrm_node_no
pid_node_number_a - 10
# dwnstrm_node_no
pid_node_number_b - 11
flow_direction - 14
# line_no_label
line_number_label - 21
# dwg_occ_no
drawing_segment_index_no - 3
line_id - 12
# piping_thk_flag
piping_thickness_flag - 68
### Data extracted from the Equipment Table ( eq_group, 106 ) of the P&ID Design Database:
equipment_number - 7
### Data extracted from the Equipment Nozzle Table ( eq_nozz, 108 ) of the P&ID Design Database:
nozzle_number - 5
# pid_seg_occ_no
198
nozzle_segment_index - 4
# eq_grp_occ_no
equipment_nozzle_index - 2
# node_no
equip_nozzle_node_no - 13
### Data extracted from the Piping Component Table ( piping_comp, 120 ) of the P&ID Design Database:
#piping_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below belongs to

# P&IDs piping_comp table and Pipings pdtable_34_<partition_number>.
# piping_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to pdtable_34.
piping_comp_table
piping_comp_number 2 6
aabbcc_code 3 9
commodity_code_flag - 28
cmdty_code 8 29
# opt attribute in P&ID is placed into the option_code attribute in Piping

commodity_option_code 5 27
# pid_seg_occ_no
comp_segment_index_no - 3
# dwg_occ_no
comp_drawing_index_no - 2
# generic_tag_no
specialty_generic_tag_no - 44
#any attributes you desire to transfer (beyond those defined above) are listed
# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID piping_comp table
# and piping pdtable_34. NOTE: Complete, partial and default do NOT
# apply to these attributes.
#attribute name (any thing) piping attr no p&id attr no
const_status 32 23
heat_tracing_media 35 34
heat_tracing_reqmts 34 33
hold_status 33 41
ht_tracing_media_temp 36 35
opening_action 31 17
remarks 46 20
### Data extracted from the Instrument Component Table ( instr_comp, 131 )of the P&ID Design Databas
#instr_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below belongs to

# P&IDs instr_comp table and Pipings pdtable_67_<partition_number>.
# instr_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to pdtable_67.
instr_comp_table
instrument_tag_number - 5
# pid_seg_occ_no
instr_segment_index_no - 4
# aabbcc_code
instr_aabbcc_code - 10
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
199
________________
# dwg_occ_no
instr_drawing_index_no - 3
#generic_tag_no
instr_generic_tag_no - 80
#any attributes you desire to transfer (beyond those defined above) are listed
# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID instr_comp table
# and piping pdtable_67. NOTE: Complete, partial and default do NOT
# apply to these attributes.
#attribute name (any thing) piping attr no p&id attr no
cleaning_reqmts 39 60
const_resp 32 35
const_status 29 24
dgn_resp 31 25
fail_action_1 28 56
heat_tracing_media 34 28
heat_tracing_reqmts 33 27
hold_status 30 40
ht_tracing_media_temp 35 29
insulation_purpose 36 31
insulation_thick 37 33
module_no 41 36
package_system_no 42 38
remark_2 52 22
safety_classification 40 20
### Data extracted from the Drawing Table ( dwg, 102 ) of the P&ID Project Database:
drawing_number - 3
#unit_occ_no
unit_index_number - 2
drawing_title - 16
network_address - 7
path_name - 8
file_specification - 5
propagation_status - 10
approval_initials - 21
approval_date - 22
revision_id - 27
for_comments_date - 29
for_design_date - 30
for_construct_date - 31
task_name - 4
### Data extracted from the Unit Table ( unit, 101 ) of the P&ID Project Database:
unit_number - 4
unit_code - 3
unit_name - 5
200
### Data extracted from the Task RDB Table ( task_rdb, 98 ) of the P&ID Project Database:
pid_task_name - 2
pid_task_rdb_node - 3
pid_task_rdb_path - 4
### Data extracted from the PID Segment Table ( pid_seg, 110 ) of the P&ID Design Database:
# net_type_occ_no
piping_segment_index_no - 4
### Data extracted from the PID Drawing Revision Data Table ( dwg_rev_data,
### 103 ) of the P&ID Design Database includes the following:
dwg_occ_no - 2
### Data extracted from the Piping Connector Table (piping_connector, 124) of
### the P&ID Design Database includes the following:
connector_no - 4
#dwg_occ_no of the piping connector table

connect_dwg_occ_no - 2
#pid_seg_occ_no of the piping connector table

connect_pid_seg_occ_no - 3
#matching_criteria is the criteria to be used for matching the P&ID and Piping
#segments together. Nodea (piping attribute 67) and Nodeb (piping attribute 68)
#are the default criteria. The matching criteria is defined by listing the
#piping attribute numbers separated by a space on the line below.
matching_criteria 67 68
#search_mode is the method for searching for the matching criteria. The default
#is FIRST stop on the first match found. The other option is END which
#means to search the entire database looking for a match. If more than one match
#is found, the software evaluates all of the matches for an exact match of the
#transfer data.
search_mode FIRST
#exclusion_criteria has been a part of the submission process in the past. We

#have added the capability to default this value. Values are YES for do not
#check the transfer disabled segments and NO to check the transfer disabled
#segments. This option can still be modified at submission.
exclusion_criteria YES
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
201
________________
6.3 P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup

You can select and view an active P&ID while working in a piping model. This enables the
graphical transfer of piping segment data by snapping to graphics in the active P&ID. You
can also specify a component name for placement by selecting a component in the P&ID.
You can use the following options to select the active P&ID to be displayed. Only one P&ID
can be active for the purposes of data transfer.
You can select a drawing from a list of P&IDs extracted from the Project Control
Database. This list of drawings is limited to those P&IDs which have been propagated
for the active unit number in the piping model. The applicable drawings are listed in
alphanumeric order by drawing number.
Since the P&ID Database is unit dependent and the Piping Design Database is design
area dependent, one Piping design area may include data from different P&ID units.
Therefore, you must specify the correct unit number in the active segment data prior to
requesting a list of P&I drawings from the P&ID Database.
Select P&I Drawing by Line ID - You can specify a line ID by identifying piping in
the piping model or by accepting the active line id. The system determines the P&ID
(or list of drawings) from the line id. It searches the Segment Table of the P&ID
Database using the system unique number for the drawing and the line ID for the
segment.
Select P&I Drawing by Nozzle - You can specify an equipment number and nozzle
number by locating a component connected to a nozzle, by keying in an equipment
number and nozzle number, or by snapping to a nozzle in an equipment model. The
system determines the P&ID from the equipment number and nozzle number and data
in the P&ID Database.
202
________________ P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup
You can use the Review P&I Drawing Details option to display information about a selected
P&I Drawing in the active unit.
Once you select a drawing by any of the described methods, the P&I drawing and the
corresponding drawing border are attached as reference files.
A selected screen view is used to display the P&ID. The system stores this view number in
the Type 63 data for the piping model.
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
203
________________
6.4 P&ID Node Numbers

When piping segment data is transferred from the P&ID Database to the piping model, the
P&ID node numbers derived from that database are reflected in the model as a form of
associativity between the P&ID and the piping model. The following rules dictate how P&ID
node numbers are assigned during the creation of piping segments in the model.
Transferring piping segment data from the P&ID Database by any means results in the
P&ID node numbers being stored with the piping segment that is to be created by either
the Place Component or Sketch command.
If you continue creating new piping segments in the model, either by explicitly placing
a piping segment or by placing a component that results in the placement of a piping
segment, the new piping segments continue to include the P&ID node numbers from the
initial piping segment.
If, at any time, you update the piping segment data manually with the Active Segment
Data option, the P&ID node numbers for the subsequent piping segment is assigned as
undefined (blank).
Using the First Size or Second Size option to place a reducing component will not
result in the P&ID node numbers being assigned as undefined unless you also use the
Active Segment Data option.
If you place a component after specifying the active placement point with the Connect
to Design option, the P&ID node numbers for the subsequent piping segment is derived
from those of the connected piping.
The P&ID node numbers are assigned as undefined when you connect to a nozzle,
unless the active segment data is then updated from the P&ID Database.
If you place a component after specifying the active placement point with the Point in
Space option, the P&ID node numbers for the subsequent piping segment is assigned as
undefined (blank).
If, in the Sketch command, you place a piping segment after specifying the active
placement point with the Construct Point option, the P&ID node numbers for the
subsequent piping segment are assigned as undefined (blank).
204
________________ Update Segment Data from P&ID
6.5 Update Segment Data from P&ID

You can update the active segment data by node number, by equipment/nozzle ID, or by
snapping to graphics in the active P&ID.
You can specify that the piping segment data transfer be complete or partial on the basis of
the Correlation Table. The default mode is complete, and once the piping segment has been
created in the model the active mode is restored to complete. In other words, the next
operation will revert to complete data transfer, unless you explicitly select partial data
transfer.
A warning message is displayed if any one of the following conditions occurs in the process
of loading the active data from the P&ID Database.
The piping materials class from the P&ID Database is undefined in the Reference
Database
The nominal piping diameter from the P&ID Database is invalid for the piping
materials class from the P&ID Database on the basis of the NPD Table in the Piping
Specification Table Library
The active nominal piping diameter is invalid for the piping materials class from the
P&ID Database on the basis of the NPD Table in the Piping Specification Table Library
in partial data transfer, where nominal piping diameter is not loaded
The fluid code from the P&ID Database is invalid for the piping materials class from
the P&ID Database on the basis of the Fluid Code Table in the Piping Specification
Table Library for a piping materials class where a Fluid Code Table is applicable
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
205
________________
6.5.1 Update by Node Number

You can update the active segment data by specifying two P&ID node numbers. This option
is provided in both the Place Component and Sketch commands. You can accept both or
either of the two active (previously specified) P&ID node numbers.
The P&ID Database is referenced using the P&ID project number. A single table is read from
this database using unit number, P&ID node number A, and P&ID node number B. Since
the P&ID Database is unit dependent and the Piping Design Database is design area
dependent, one Piping design area may include data from different P&ID units, each unit
being designated by a unique unit number.
The order of the P&ID node numbers, as specified by the user, determines the assignment of
flow direction in the piping model. By convention, P&ID node number A is at the Active
Placement Point. As a part of the data transfer process, the P&ID node numbers are stored in
the piping model for subsequent use and to retain the associativity between the segment in the
P&ID Database and the segment(s) in the piping model. Likewise, the unique index into the
P&ID segment table is stored in the piping model in order to enable the later comparison and
update of P&ID node numbers from the P&ID Database into the piping model. It is possible
that the P&ID node numbers may be changed by the P&ID propagation process for a specific
segment in the P&ID Database as a result of changes to the P&ID.
6.5.2 Transfer by Equipment Number and Nozzle

Number
You can update the active segment data by specifying an equipment number and nozzle
number. If you are actively connected to a nozzle in the model, this option automatically
searches the P&ID Database using the active equipment number and nozzle number.
Otherwise, you must either snap to the appropriate nozzle or key in the equipment number and
nozzle number for the appropriate nozzle. This option is provided in both the Place
Component and Sketch commands.
The system accesses the P&ID Database using the P&ID project number. A single table is
read from this database using the unit number, the equipment number, and the nozzle number.
The assignment of flow direction in the piping model is determined by the flow direction at
the nozzle end of the segment in the P&ID. As a part of the data transfer process, the P&ID
node numbers determined from reading the segment table in the P&ID Database are stored in
the piping model for subsequent use and to retain the associativity between the segment in the
P&ID Database and the segment(s) in the piping model. Likewise, the unique index into the
P&ID segment table is stored in the piping model in order to enable the later comparison and
update of P&ID node numbers from the P&ID Database into the piping model. It is possible
that the P&ID node numbers may be changed by the P&ID propagation process for a specific
segment in the P&ID Database as a result of changes to the P&ID.
206
________________ Update by Node Number
6.5.3 Update From Active P&I Drawing

You can update the active segment data by snapping to graphics in the active P&ID. The
system reads a single table from the P&ID Database using the unit number and the attribute
linkage from the segment in the P&ID.
If you identify a component in the P&ID that is associated with more than one segment, such
as a reducer, the active segment data is derived from the segment associated with the connect
point nearest the identification point.
The order of the P&ID node numbers determines the assignment of flow direction in the
piping model. By convention, P&ID node number A is at the Active Placement Point. As a
part of the data transfer process, the P&ID node numbers are stored in the piping model for
subsequent use and to retain the associativity between the segment in the P&ID Database and
the segment(s) in the piping model. The unique index into the P&ID Segment Table is also
stored in the piping model to enable the comparison and update of P&ID node numbers from
the P&ID Database into the piping model. The P&ID node numbers may be changed by the
P&ID propagation process for a specific segment in the P&ID Database as a result of changes
to the P&I drawing.
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
207
________________
6.6 P&ID Data

Revise Attributes
You can update the data for a previously placed piping segment using the Revise Attributes
command, by specifying two P&ID node numbers.
The order of the input of the two P&ID node numbers is used to control the assignment of
flow direction in the piping model. P&ID node number A is associated with end 1 of the
segment, while P&ID node number B will be associated with end 2.
As with the previously described option, the piping segment data will be updated based upon
the Correlation Table. Likewise, the user has the option to specify that the piping segment
data transfer is to be complete or partial on the basis of the Correlation Table. You can also
update the data for a previously placed piping segment by snapping to graphics in the active
P&ID.
Attribute Break
You can load the piping segment data for an attribute break, using the Attribute Break
command, by specifying two P&ID node numbers.
The order of the input of the two P&ID node numbers is used to control the assignment of
flow direction in the piping model. P&ID node number A is associated with the end of the
piping segment being placed at the attribute breaks location, while P&ID node number B is
associated with other end of the piping segment being placed.
Under user control, the revised piping segment will retain the existing piping segment data,
including the P&ID node numbers. The new piping segment is created from the original
piping segment with data being transferred from the P&ID Database using those P&ID node
numbers specified by the user. This piping segment is created with the new P&ID node
numbers.
As with the previously described option, the piping segment data is updated based upon the
Correlation Table. Likewise, the user has the option to specify that the piping segment data
transfer is to be complete or partial on the basis of the Correlation Table. You can also load
the piping segment data for an attribute break by snapping to graphics in the active P&ID.
208
________________ Name From P&ID
6.7 Name From P&ID

You can use the Name From P&ID option on the Place Component form to select the piping
or instrument component to be placed by identifying a component in the P&ID. It retrieves
the piping commodity name for a piping commodity, the piping component number for a
piping specialty, or the instrument component number for an instrument for use in reading
from the Reference Database. No other component data is read from the P&ID database.
Transfer
6. P&ID Data
209
________________
6.8 P&ID Data Comparison Options

The P&ID Data Comparison Options command is provided as part of the Diagnostics
command for the purpose of specifying the data comparison option for piping segments in the
model. You have two options with this command.
the ability to mark a piping segment to have segment data comparisons inhibited (or
enabled) in the P&ID Data Comparison Report. This option is intended to assist the
user by not reporting extraneous piping segments which do not exist in the P&ID
Database and have not been assigned P&ID node numbers in the piping model, i.e.
segment data has not been transferred from the P&ID database. Note that the default
mode for all piping segments created in the model is to have P&ID data comparisons
enabled. Thus it is not necessary for the user to take any action to enable P&ID data
comparisons, unless the user had previously and inadvertently designated that P&ID
data comparisons be inhibited for a particular piping segment.
a rules-based command for the purpose of automatically marking piping segments

corresponding to vents, drains, and off-line instrument connections for being optionally
ignored in P&ID data comparisons. The option is intended to assist the user by not
reporting extraneous piping segments which may not exist in the P&ID Database and
usually are not assigned P&ID node numbers in the piping model.
These piping segments representing vents, drains, and off-line instrument connections is
marked in the user data of the piping segment. Such designations will only have an
impact, if the user chooses to have these piping segments excluded from the P&ID Data
Comparison Report.
The limit for the maximum number of vent/drain valves and instrument connections
that can be processed in one piping model is 200 for each (expanded from 100).
210
________________ Detecting and Managing Interferences
7. Detecting and Managing

Interferences
7. Interferences
This chapter provides information required to understand the terminology and philosophy
involved with interference detection.
Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) processes a specified design volume for

interference clashes. You can check for, review, and revise interferences at any stage of the
design process.
The first section in this chapter is an overview of the interference management process; it
briefly covers the following topics:
Software setup
Interference envelope generation
Clash detection
Clash management and tracking
The second section is a review of project organization and the different units into which a
plant/project can be broken for ease of manupulation.
The third section describes how to set up a system to support interference detection.
The fourth and final section is a general description of interference envelopes, the various
types of interferences (clashes) and what happens during interference detection and
management.
7.1 Interference Checking Process

Overview
The following outlines the basic steps associated with interference detection and management.
Setup (outside the Interference Manager

module)
1. Define data with the Project Environment Manager.
Volume/Area definitions determine the extent of the project to process. The

extent may be physical by defining pre-defined volumes or logical by grouping
models in a design area.
211
________________
To disable interference checking between certain disciplines, use the Intra

Discipline Interference Check toggle when defining the Discipline data.
2. Define interference data with the Project Data Manager.
The construction tolerance, the necessary space allocated beyond that which is
necessary for the component and its insulation, for each discipline is defined
with the Construction Tolerance form.
The action discipline is used to assign responsibility for a clash to a certain

discipline. The action discipline is defined using the Select Action Discipline
option on the Interference Check Data form.
The defined action discipline appears on plots and in the Action Discipline: field
on the Interference Manager form in the Interference Checker/Manager
module.
Interference Envelopes:
3. The system accesses the model files to generate envelope files. The envelope files have
a .env file extension. It is the envelope file and not the design file that is compared
during interference detection.
4. The graphical volume for each component is defined by an interference envelope

parametric shape definition. This is an Eden module similar to the parametric shape
module used to place the component in graphics.
Before performing interference detection on newly created or modified interference

envelope parametric shape definitions, use the Envelope Diagnostics option to generate
a MicroStation-type graphic from the interference envelope. The graphics file is named
after the envelope with a .til file extension.
5. Verify the consistency between the dates of envelope files and current design files using
the Envelope Verification option. The results of the verification indicate which
envelopes need to be updated.
Clash Detection:
6. Run the Interference Checker option to compare the envelope files for clashes within
the specified area or volume.
7. A volume filter can be set for single runs of interference detection. Only the clashes
found within the specified volume are available for review after an interference
detection run using this option.
8. For pre-defined volume design areas, the system checks all models within the pre-
defined volume. This includes the portion of any model envelope file that encroaches
within that volume regardless of its discipline.
212
________________ Detecting and Managing Interferences
OR
For regular design areas, the system defines the volume as that which encompasses all
model envelope files within the selected design area. This includes the portion of any
7. Interferences
model envelope file that encroaches within that volume regardless of its discipline or
design area assignment.
9. For the specified area/volume, the system processes all of the portions of model
envelopes or pairs of envelopes, for example:
Model A vs Model B
Model A vs Model C
Model A vs Model D
Model B vs Model C
Model B vs Model D
Model C vs Model D
10. When a clash is detected, it is written to the database, and the graphics representing the
clashing elements are written to the appropriate marker file. If you checked the entire
project, the clashes are written to the project marker file. If you checked a design area,
the marker file is named after the design area with the extension which represents the
discipline:
Piping = 1 Structural = 3 Raceways = 5

Equipment = 2 HVAC = 4 Architecture = 6
11. The Interference Report is created during the interference detection process and is
named after the project or design area, depending on the option selected for interference
detection, with a .int file extension. It contains only the unapproved clashes for that
run.
Tracking and Managing:

12. Edit and review existing clashes, manipulate views, and approve exisiting clashes with
the Interference Manager option. This option displays and highlights clashes within a
graphics environment, which can then be reviewed, edited or approved.
13. For unsuspected clashes, review envelopes in question using the Envelope Diagnostics
command. This command generates a report with a .evd file extension. For example,
this report contains instances such as when two or more groups of sub-components are
contained within one component but are not geometrically connected, in other words do
not have overlapping ranges.
14. Clashes can be plotted any time after interference detection using the Interfence Plot
Manager option.
15. Aside from the Interferences Report, which is automatically generated during
interference detection with the Interference Checker option, reporting on the Project
Control Data is done using the Interference Report Manager. Discrimination data and
format files are used to generate specific types of reports. This sort of report might
213
________________
include a list of clashes involving the structural discipline, the approval status of those
clashes, and the action discipline assigned to these clashes.
214
________________ Project Organization
7.2 Project Organization
7. Interferences
As discussed in Chapter 1, PDS uses the following organization to break the plant into smaller
units that can be handled more easily.
A project is a convenient grouping of all of the items that constitute a plant. The project is the
fundamental structure for working in PDS. The project constitutes the entire volume of the
project.
A design area represents a specified volume or logical area of the project for a specific
discipline. Design areas can be used to break up the project into smaller areas for interference
checking or reporting. This speeds up processing when only a portion of the project has
changed. The models or model components that are not within the area/volume will not be
checked.
A design area pre-defined volume represents a pre-defined volume of the project for a specific
discipline. The volume is defined by using the Project Environment Manager. Make sure
that the pre-defined volume encompasses all the models that you want to be checked. The
models or model components that are not within the volume will not be checked. The Pre-
defined volume is used to encompass models and model components that might not have been
grouped together otherwise, or to define a design area that is smaller than usual.
A model is a 3D Microstation file that has a defined discipline and is located within the
volume of the project. A model represents a subdivision of the project based on work
responsibility, completion of schedules, and computer response time.
A volume filter can be used to decrease the volume of a project, area, or pre-defined volume to
further decrease the processing time when only a sub-part requires checking or reporting.
215
________________
7.2.1 Understanding Design Areas and Volumes

This section describes design areas and volumes and how they pertain to interference
checking.
Running the Interference Checker for an entire project takes considerably longer than running
it for a design area. If the project workload is being shared, one of the design area options
would be the most efficient. The design area options are less time consuming and create
individual sets of reports rather than one set of reports for the entire project. Adhere to using
either the Project option or one of the Design Area options for the life of the project for the
most consistent results.
Project
This option on the Interference Checker form performs clash checking for all of the
envelope files defined for the project and creates interference, difference, and batch queue
error reports. To specify a smaller volume for a single clash check, set the Volume Filter
toggle to On.
The dotted rectangle signifies the volume that is processed using the Project option.
Piping Design Area and Design Area

These options display a list of design areas for the specified discipline that are available for
clash checking. After a design area has been selected, the system defines a volume that
encompasses all models within the selected design area. It then performs an interference
check on all models and parts of models, including models from all other disciplines, that are
in the defined volume. To specify a smaller volume for a single interference check, set the
Volume Filter toggle to On after selecting a design area.
216
________________ Understanding Design Areas and Volumes
The dotted rectangle signifies the volume that is processed using the Design Area option.
The name of the selected design area is DesA1.
7. Interferences
Design Area and Piping Design Area Pre-
defined Volume
These options display a list of design areas with pre-defined volumes available for clash
checking. After a design area has been selected, the system uses the pre-defined volume (as
specified through the Project Environment Manager). It then performs an interference
check on all models and parts of models, including models from all other disciplines, that are
in the pre-defined volume.
The Interference Checker does not include models or parts of models that are
in the selected design area that do not fall within the pre-defined volume.
The dotted rectangle signifies the volume that is processed using the Design Area Pre-
defined Volume option. The name of the selected design area is DesAPreV1.
217
________________
If you use Pre-defined Volumes as your method of checking, it is recommended that

you run a project wide check at the end of the project to ensure that nothing was
missed. However, you should not switch between Pre-defined Volume and Project on
a consistent basis.
Volume Filter
This option creates a Volume Filter for one run of the Interference Checker. When set to
Volume Filter On, you can define the low and high Easting, Northing, and Elevation
coordinates for one run of the Interference Checker in the following fields. When set to
Volume Filter Off the system will use the default or pre-defined volume.
A volume filter can be used to decrease the volume of a project, area, or pre-defined volume
to further decrease the processing time when only a sub-part requires checking or reporting.
The dotted rectangle signifies the volume that is processed when the Volume Filter has been
activated and the volume to be checked has been specified.
218
________________ Understanding Design Areas and Volumes
7. Interferences
Single/Dual Ownership of Clashes
PD_Clash can be set up to allow single or dual ownership of clashes. This is very useful
when more than one design area needs to own, review, or approve a clash.
PD_Clash provides the capability for dual ownershipownership available to each design area
that CONTAINS a component involved in a clash (when interference detection is run on that
area) or single ownershipownership assigned to the first design area to find the clash.
Dual ownership does not mean that ownership is automatically given to both design areas
when a clash is found. It means that ownership is available to both design areas when
interference detection is run on each.
Since clashes are stored in the database, reports can still be run on both design
areas involved in a clash, even if interference detection has not been run on
both design areas. However, clashes are only written to the applicable design
areas marker file during the interference detection process for each design
area. Therefore, clashes can only be reviewed and approved in design areas on
which interference detection has been run.
This option does not define ownership assignments once clashes have been found. It acts a
filter in the interference-detection process.
By default clash checking is done in Single (1) Design Area Ownership mode. In this mode,
each clash belongs to the design area in which it was first found. When clash checking is done
in this mode, clashes involving models that do not belong to the design area being checked are
still assigned to that design area.
219
________________
For instance, if design area C were checked for interferences in the Single (1) Design Area
Ownership mode, the system would compare all models that fall within the specified volume
including:
- all models against themselves

- all design area A models against design area B models
- all design area C models against design area A models
- all design area C models against design area B models.
All of the clashes would belong to design area C.
In the Dual (2) Design Area Ownership mode, ownership is not based on the first design
area to find the clashes but on the design areas which own the components involved in a clash.
Interference checking is performed between models belonging to the design area being
checked and all other models that fall within the volume of that design area. Clashes that do
not involve at least one component from the design area being checked would not be found.
For instance, if design area C were checked for interferences in the Dual (2) Design Area
Ownership mode, the system would compare models in design area C with models falling
within the specified volume including:
- all design area C models against themselves

- all design area C models against design area A models
- all design area C models against design area B models.
The clashes found involving, for instance, design area C models against design area A models
would be owned by design area C. Clashes could be reviewed and approved in design area C
and reports could be run on either design area C or design area A. You could not review or
approve clashes in design area A until you had run interference detection on it.
Clashes that do not involve at least one component from design area C models would not be
found.
220
________________ Setting Up a System to Support Interference Detection
7.3 Setting Up a System to Support

Interference Detection
7. Interferences
The following project setup considerations are necessary to support interference checking.
1. Load software
All PDS servers and workstations must be loaded with the same release of PDS and
nucleus software. The PDS software between servers and workstations must be
compatible to run correctly. It is highly recommended that you read the Release Notes
of the PD_CLASH README file when new releases are issued so that you will be
informed of any changes made to the product. The CAD Support person would most
likely do this.
2. Set up plot queues.
The Interference Manager provides one default and four optional plot queues for
different types of plotters. The selection of the plot queue applies to all graphic
interference clash plots in a batch process. Multiple queues provide the flexibility in
situations that arise which require different plotters for different paper types. This step
would be completed by the CAD Support/System or Project Manager.
3. Define discipline responsibilities.
The interference software uses area and model data to locate the models within a
specific design area for processing. This is done when the areas and model files are
created. The location of the area marker file and model design file are stored by the
system using data provided via the Project Environment Manager.
Marker files are used by the software to place graphic markers for clashes that are
detected during interference checking.
4. Decide on Project or Area processing.
Interference checking can be done for the entire project or it can be divided into small
portions called design areas. The processing time for an entire project is much greater
than for a design area. Also, it is often the case that only a certain design area or set of
design areas need to be checked.
Once you decide which method to use, either the Project option or the
design area options, remain consistent. The more consistent you are
with your option selection, the more consistent the results will be. For
example, you might select a design area option and receive the results
for one design area. You might correct a few of the interferences and
then run interference checking with the Project option. Remember, the
interference checker will only report new clashes, therefore, old clashes
would not be reported again although they may still exist in the design
area that was first checked. This step would be done by the Interference
Manager.
221
________________
5. Define model graphics.
A set of model files for the project must be defined before you can use the Interference
Checker/Manager.
222
________________ Understanding Interference Envelopes
7.4 Understanding Interference

Envelopes
7. Interferences
Envelope Builder
Piping, equipment, structural, raceway, and HVAC envelope files are created through the PDS
Interference Manager module. All Architectural files will have their interference envelope
files created within the Architecture product.
The envelope builder command performs the following tests to detect the situation where the
graphics for a model, that is not associated with the selected design area, encroaches into the
volume represented by that design area:
If the envelope file which corresponds to the model is Up-To-Date with respect to the
model, the envelope builder will not re-create the envelope file.
If the envelope file which corresponds to the model is Not-Up-To-Date with respect to
the model, but it has interference envelopes in the volume of the selected design area,
then the envelope file for the model is re-created.
If the envelope file which corresponds to the model is Not-Up-To-Date with respect to
the model and it does not have any interference envelopes which fall within the volume
of the selected design area, then the envelope builder determines if the model has any
components which falls in the volume of the selected design area. If so, the envelope
file for that model is re-created.
Log files are batch queue error reports for the envelope builder data server that contain
information regarding any errors. These files have the extension .ebl and are created in
the \temp directory on the server or workstation from which the process was submitted.
You should review this file.
Envelope Verification
The Envelope Verification command sorts the models being verified into one of the
following categories:
Up-To-Date: those interference envelopes that are consistent with respect to the model.
Not Up-To-Date: those interference envelopes that are inconsistent with respect to the
model and may require being re-created. This is because either the model has been
revised since the interference envelopes were created, or the interference envelope file
is non-existent.
Not Mounted: an error occurred while mounting the file system where the model
resides.
223
________________
Any discrepancies found during this verification process indicate problems in the applicable
Envelope Builder and will be reported in a file in the \temp directory named after the project
or design area with a .evd file extension.
Envelope Diagnostics
The Envelope Diagnostics command creates MicroStation graphics from the interference
envelopes for the model, in a file named <model name>.til. This file, placed in the same
directory as the model, is used to view the interference envelopes interactively through
MicroStation to verify if the envelopes are correct.
7.4.1 Understanding Interference Checking

Once an interference philosophy has been determined, select the option to run the batch
Interference Checker. Use your choice of either the Project option or any of the design area
options consistently throughout the interference checking process.
The Project option is the largest area of the project and encompasses every model file.
The Design Area options process a smaller division of a project with a limited number
of model files.
The Pre-Defined Volume option allows you to control the volume checked by
specifying specific volume coordinates. If not used, the system determines the volume
based on the volume of the envelope files in the area being checked (which can vary
over the life of a project).
The Volume Filter toggle specifies a smaller volume of any of the options above.
Once the Interference Checker has been run, you can review the clashes interactively with
the Interference Manager.
The Piping Designer provides a command to check interferences interactively

while working in the piping design file. This option only checks one pipeline
(or a group) against reference files that have a previously created envelope file.
Unlike the Interference Checker, the Piping Design command does not write
clash information to the database. It is intended as a quick check for the piping
designer.
Interference Checker Input

The following are used as input by the PDS Interference Checker:
The data collected by the forms interface.
224
Interference envelope files which correspond to model volumes or design areas.
Information in the Project Control Database. The approval status of each known
interference is stored in the Project Control Database. When an interference is
7. Interferences
approved, it is no longer be included in future interference reports. This allows all
interferences within a project to be resolved, either by changing the approval status of
the interference to Approved or by revising the model.
Information in the Material Reference Database. The following database tables can be
used to exclude items from interference checking.
The Component Insulation Exclusion Data table (PDtable_231) allows you to

completely or partially exclude the insulation of components that are on insulated
lines, during interference checking. If this table is not loaded, the insulation
thickness is completely included in the components interference envelope.
The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data table (PD_table 232) provides for partial
exclusion of flange insulation thickness from the generation of interference
envelopes. This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table the
insulation thickness is completely included in the components interference
envelope.
Interference Checker Output

The following are generated by running the Interference Checker:
PDS Interference Report. This report contains all unapproved clashes, sorted first by
model combinations then by the type of clash. For instance, all clashes detected
between model A and model B are grouped together. A synopsis of the clashes is
included at the beginning of the report. This report also includes the model status of
any components involved in a clash for the piping, structural, HVAC, and equipment
disciplines. This status is that of the model and not of the clash.
These reports are named after the project or design area with a .int file extension and are
created each time the checker is run. The interference report is created at the location
specified with the Interference Report Management Data option. The report begins
with a synopsis of all clashes found during interference processing and includes a report
of the clashing items within each of the design files represented in the synopsis.
PDS Interference Synopsis
mbpip2.env
Number of clashes = 14
PDS Interference Report
Date: 23-Jun-93 Time: 13:42:13
Model A Design File Name: mbpip2
Entire Design Volume Included In Report
225
________________
PDS Interference Clashes

Hard/Hard Clashes
No Item Name Table Row X Coord Y Coord Z Coord

__ _________ _____ ___ _______ _______ _______
48 2CPINSTRUMENT 6 4194305 E 1 3 15/16" Plant N 2000 0" Plant El 0 0" Plant

meblabels-6IN-1C00310 "
Not approved
48 PIPE 5 4194306 E 40 2 3/16" Plant N 1999 10" Plant El 0 0" Plant

ifcclash pipe-1IN-1C00310 "
Not approved
49 3CPINSTRUMENT 6 4194306 E 8 4" Plant N 2000 0" Plant El 0 0" Plant

Not approved

Not approved
50 2CPSPECIALTY 3 4194306 E 13 4 1/8" Plant N 2000 0" Plant El 0 0" Plant

Not approved

Not approved
51 3CPSPECIALTY 3 4194307 E 18 4 1/4" Plant N 2000 0" Plant El 0 0" Plant

Not approved

Not approved
52 T 3 4194309 E 26 8 9/16" Plant N 2000 0" Plant El 0 0" Plant

Not approved

Not approved

Not approved

Not approved
54 pipesupport 8 4194305 E 31 2 3/16" Plant N 2000 6" Plant El -1 1 9/16" Plant

Not approved
54 PIPE 5 4194308 E 40 2 3/16" Plant N 1999 4" Plant El -6" Plant

Not approved

Not approved
55 CKS 3 4194321 E 22 6 1/16" Plant N 2000 0" Plant El 0 0" Plant

1construct-6IN-1C00310 "
Not approved
Interference Markers. All interferences within the project are graphically represented
by markers and are used by the Interference Manager. Each time the Interference
Checker detects an interference within the project, a marker is written to one of the
marker design files. The project marker file is created in the project directory during
project creation. It is named after the project database with a .dgn extension. Area
226
marker files can be created as each piping or equipment design area is defined in the
Project Control Database.
The interference markers are numbered in the .int report with a system-assigned
7. Interferences
sequential number starting with 1. Any previously approved markers (interferences)
will not be replaced unless the corresponding model items have been graphically
modified.
Error File. If an error is found while running the Interference Checker, the system
writes the item name and an error code in a file named after either the project or design
area, depending on the option selected to run the Interference Checker, with a .icl file
extension. Runtime errors are written to a file with a .err extension.
Log files. Each batch job creates a log file which is placed in the \temp directory. Any
run time errors will be listed in these log files.
Project Control Database Records. The following tables are updated by Interference
Checking:
Clash Management Data (131). A record is created each time Interference

Checking is run.
Interference Clash Data Per Project (132). A record is created for each clash in
the project. The unique_clash_id uniquely identifies a clash.
Interference Clash Data Per Job (133). A record is created each time a clash is
encountered.
Component Clash Data Per Project (134). A record is created for each model
item which is involved in one or more clashes.
These records are used by subsequent executions of the Interference Checker and
Interference Manager.
Clash Plots. These files are named by the system as the marker number with the
extension .plt and placed in the \temp directory (or you may use the Interference Clash
Plot Manager to specify a different node and directory). The system automatically
generates the plots through the PDifc_plot queue.
Interference Manager
The interference manager is used to review all interferences in a project or area and revise the
approval status of a single interference marker or a group of interference markers.
227
________________
Clash Categories
The Interference Manager and the reports created by the Interference Checker distinguish
between three categories of interference clashes. See the graphics on the following page for
examples of clashes.
Hard. A clash which exists between actual physical components, equipment, or

structures.
Soft. A clash which exists between non-physical space envelopes, such as, insulation,
maintenance accessways, or safety envelopes.
Construction. A clash or discrepancy which exists between the user-defined distance

and the actual distance of two components in specified disciplines defined using
PD_Project. For instance, if piping components are required to be at least 1" away from
all structural components but one is found closer, a Construction clash is reported.
Clash Precedence
The precedence for reporting clashes is Hard, Soft, and Construction. This results in the
interference clash being reported in one of the following categories. The report will contain
only the category of clashes with the highest precedence in accordance with the following
precedence table:
Hard - Hard
Hard - Soft
Hard - Construction
Soft - Soft
Soft - Construction
Construction - Construction.
228
Hard - Hard Example

The following example contains clashes between actual physical components. It would be
7. Interferences
categorized as a Hard - Hard clash.
Hard - Soft Example

The following example displays a clash between an actual component and space that has been
allocated for maintenance accessways. It would be categorized as a Hard - Soft clash.
229
________________
7.4.2 Understanding Interference Plotting

The Interference Plot Manager option plots clashes generally by project or design area.
Within these choices, you can plot clashes by:
The clash plot status.
The clash approval status.
The clash review status.
The clash category.
The group or individual clash selections from a list of clashes in marker file.
The Interference Clash Plot Management option defines a default node and path for future
clash plot files.
This is a required step in the Interference Checking Process. Problems could occur
later in the process if this step has not been completed.
7.4.3 Understanding Interference Reporting

The interferences report is generated automatically during interference detection with the
Interference Checker option. You can create user-defined reports on the Project Control
Data using the Interference Report Manager. Discrimination data and format files are used
to generate specific types of reports, such as a list of clashes involving the structural
discipline, the approval status of those clashes, and the action discipline assigned to these
clashes.
The interface and process for interfence reporting is similar to that used in the PDS Report
Manager module.
230
________________ Creating Material Takeoffs and Other Reports
8. Creating Material Takeoffs and

Other Reports
8.1 Reporting Process

The following outlines the basic steps associated with the Material Take-Off process.
8. Reporting
1. Pre-defined report data determines the discrimination data (such as which models to
process) and the format (content and layout) of the report.
2. For the specified models (and using any additional discrimination data, such as line
size), the system scans the physical elements in the model.
3. The system determines the number of items present in the model by unique commodity
code. In addition to the physical elements, it determines any implied items based on
configuration of mating components or designations in the Piping Commodity
Specification Data (PCD).
4. The system looks up the material descriptions for the located components and implied
items in the Material Description Library.
5. The system writes a report of the located and calculated items based on pre-defined
report format.
There are two main user tasks necessary for creating reports:
Maintaining the data that defines the format, content and approval status of the reports.
Processing reports by activating the interface to extract data from all of the PDS
models, databases, and libraries that are involved in a project.
8.2 Maintaining Report Definition Data

The Report Manager uses both report definition files, such as discrimination data files and
format files, along with database records that represent these files to generate reports.
The two most important files that must be maintained in a report creation process are the
discrimination data file and the format file. The discrimination data file, which defines the
search criteria for a report, is maintained interactively with the Report Manager. The format
file is generated outside of the interface using an ASCII text editor. There are several sample
format files that are delivered with the PDS 3D products. You can use these files as examples
for creating format files to meet your specific needs.
231
________________
8.2.1 Understanding Report Files and Records

The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process.
8.2.1.1 Format File

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII-text file which contains special indices identifying
what data appears in the report, how the data is sorted, and how the data is formatted in the
report. A set of basic format files are delivered for several types of reports. Using the Report
Format option, you can create a database record for each format file so that it can be accessed
for report processing. Without the format record, the Report Manager is unable to access
format files.
Format Record
The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a
specific format file. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report
processing but, it is not an actual file. It is created interactively. There are five format
definitions in the format record:
Number Defines a unique number to name the record with up to 24 characters in the
Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the
format file.
Description Describes the format file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control
Database.
File Specification Defines the file name of the ASCII format file. The system
verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.
Path Defines the disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.
Node Defines the nodename where the format file is located. This field retains the
active setting.
8.2.1.2 Discrimination Data File

The discrimination data file defines the search criteria which is used to limit the report to only
the specified database occurrences. It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the
Report Manager. You also create a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data
file so that it can be accessed for report processing.
232
________________ Creating Material Takeoffs and Other Reports
Discrimination Data Record

The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and
locate a specific discrimination data file. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data
that is used for report processing but is not an actual file. It is created using the Report
Manager. There are five discrimination data definitions in the discrimination data record:
Number Defines a unique number to name the record with up to 24 characters in the
Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the
discrimination data file.
Description Describes the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the
8. Reporting
Project Control Database.
File Specification Defines the file name of the discrimination data file to reference.
The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.
Path Defines the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the
active setting.
Node Defines the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field
retains the active setting.
8.2.1.3 Report Record

The report record defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report,
including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used
for report processing but is not an actual file.) It is created using the Report Manager. There
are seven report definitions in the report record:
Report Number Creates a unique report number in the Project Control Database
that acts as a name or identifier for a report record.
Report Title Describes the report file. It is not the title in the actual report. That
title is specified in the format file.
Report File Spec Defines the file name of the report output file. Each time a file is
re-generated using the same report file, the report output file is overwritten. Change
this field to save the old report output file and generate a new one.
Report File Path Defines the directory for the report output file.
Report Node Specifies the nodename for the report output file.
Report Format File Specifies the record number that contains the address of the
report format file to be used.
233
________________
Report Discrimination Data Specifies the record number that contains the address
of the discrimination data to be used.
8.2.1.4 Report Output

The Report Manager creates a report using the specified format and discrimination data files
and places it in the directory specified.
234
________________ Processing Reports
8.3 Processing Reports

Since there are reporting capabilities in various PDS modules, the format file, the
discrimination data file and the module where the report process is activated determine what
type of report is created.
For instance, you can create MTO reports with Report Manager and Drawing reports with
the report manager module of Drawing Manager. Depending on the definition data used and
the module that executes the process, you can create MTO reports, drawing reports, spec
reports, table checker reports, project reports, or interference reports.
The following section describes the various report types, how they are generated, and their
8. Reporting
corresponding sample format files:
8.4 Report Types

Various modules in the PDS Suite generate reports. The following section describes the
various report types, how they are generated, and their corresponding sample format files:
MTO Report (with implied materials) Generates reports on PDS piping and
equipment models involving data from the Design Database, Reference Database,
Project Database, and Material Description Libraries. This type of report will also
include implied mating data, such as bolts, gaskets, and welds by determining the
connectivity of the piping and equipment. Format files used in this type of report
primarily use A and B prefixed indices. This report is generated using the Report
Manager.
Drawing Report Generates reports on PDS Piping and Equipment drawing views
and drawing files. This report is the same type of report as the MTO report generated
by the Report Manager. Format files used in this type of report primarily use A and B
prefixed indices. This report is generated using the Drawing Manager.
Spec Report Generates reports on the Reference Database and Material Description
Libraries. The spec report is used to report on data in the reference database. Format
files used to create this type of report primarily use C prefixed indices. This report is
generated by the Reference Data Manager.
Table Checker Report Generates reports on the Reference Database and Material
Description Libraries. The table checker report is used to test Eden modules and tables
that would be executed by the Piping Commodity items within the Reference Database.
Format files used to create this type of report primarily use C prefixed indices. This
report is generated by the Reference Data Manager.
Project Report Generates reports on the Project Control Database. Format files used
in this type of report primarily use D prefixed indices. This report is generated using the
Project Administrator.
235
________________
Interference Report Generates reports on the project control database. clash area,
clash type, and clash approval along with the search criteria specified in the
discrimination data define what interference data is reported. Format files used in this
type of report primarily use D prefixed indices. This report is generated using the
Interference Manager/Checker.
236
________________ Report Format File
8.5 Report Format File

The reporting process is driven by a format file that determines the contents and format of the
report. It must be created with a text editor prior to report processing.
The format file is a standard ASCII file which contains all the needed criteria for creating the
actual report, such as text position, special indices for input into the report, and sorting
instructions for the indices.
8.5.1 Format File Syntax
8. Reporting
The format file is based on fields. A field contains a complete description of a given piece of
data to be placed in an ASCII report file.
Each line of the format file contains the entire description of one field. All fields are
independent of each other; if they have a common order in the report, you are responsible for
placing these fields in such a way that the orders match in the report. In other words, you are
responsible for defining your format file in such a way that your columns and headings will
fall under one another.
Each line in the format file can contain the following data:
Field_Function,Row,Col,Field_Len,Data_Type,Field_Type,[Buffer],[Rows/Page],[Spacing]
(Brackets [ ] indicate data that is only used for certain field types; all other data is required in
every field type.)
Syntax Example
237
________________
8.5.2 Definitions
Field_Function
0 Null Field Used to send a data field (index) to sort on an unreported item.
1 Page Field - All Pages Places the specified field once on every page of the report.
2 Page Field - First Page Only Places the specified field once on the first page of the
report.
3 Page Field - Last Page Only Places the specified field once on the last page of the
report.
4 Output Field Places the specified field a variable number of times on every page
of the report based on rows/page and spacing.
5 New Page Marker Forces a new page (form feed) after all the previous statements
have been processed. All the lines in the format file after this marker are placed on a
new (repeated) page. In other words, this enables you to append a complete format file
to the previous format file and use the same data sources and sorting as the previous
lines of the format file.
6 Continuous Page Marker Forces everything after this marker in the format file up
to a New Page Marker or the end of file to be continuously output as one page. The
specified fields are continuously output without any page divisions. (This code
overrides the value for Rows/Page)
This function can be used to generate an intermediate data file in a fixed form that
contains only raw data (without headings and other annotation). This output can then
be used as input to your own report generation software.
7 Turn On Output Field Appending Control Forces all output fields after this marker
in the format file to begin after the previous output field (above 7) is completed, that is,
all output fields will initially begin at the last output fields finishing row.
8 Turn Off Output Field Appending Control If 7 is in effect for an output field this
code will turn the effect off making output fields normal.
9 Start of output field loop
10 End of output field loop Repeats all output fields defined between codes 9 and
10 until out of data or the maximum number of lines per output field has been exceeded
by the number of lines of data between the 9 and 10 codes. These options are used to
prevent control sorts from breaking to a new page by using the remaining space on the
page before proceeding to a new page.
238
Row
Starting line number to be used in placing the field in the report. The maximum number of
rows in a report is 66.
Col
Starting column number to be used in placing the field within the specified row. The
maximum number of columns in a report is 132.
8. Reporting
Field_Len
The maximum number of characters that a field can occupy for the active row. The starting
column plus the field length must not exceed 132. A negative value will truncate a field
rather than wrap around a field (default). If the text being placed in the field exceeds the field
length, the text is continued on the next row indented one space (col + 1) until it is completed
or the page ends.
Data_Type
Code used to determine the type of translation required to convert the data to text. (Refer to
the index listings to determine the applicable data type for a particular attribute.)
1 character or [Am], where m is the number of characters
2 single precision integer or [Im]
3 double precision integer or [Im]
where m is the number of characters for the integer field
4 single precision decimal (float) or [Fm.n]
5 double precision decimal (float) or [Fm.n]
where m is the total number of characters for the decimal value including the decimal
point and n is the number of decimal places
Optional text can precede and/or follow the formatted data type within the quotation marks.
optional text [Format] optional text
[Format] can be any legal FORTRAN format statement that matches an expected output.
239
________________
Field_Type
1 Text Field. Sets the buffer for hard-coded text.
2 Data Field. Sets the buffer for an index number or code used to generate the data to
be placed in the field.
3 Generate Date/Time. No buffer required. When the report is generated, the system
date and time is placed at the designated row/col position.
4 Generate Page Number. No buffer required. When the report is generated, the
system calculates the page number and places the number at the designated row/col
position.
5 Generate Date. No buffer required. When the report is generated, the system date is
placed at the designated row/col position.
A negative value will underline the generated output for the field. (This causes the report to
be in a stream line feed file, rather than a stream carriage return file. This may impact an
existing interface to a material control system.)
[Buffer] = Field Definition

The form of the buffer depends on the value for Field_Type.
Hard coded text is enclosed in single quotes ().
For MTO reporting, the first character of the index is always A or B. Refer to the
description of the indices for MTO Reporting (with implied materials).
For spec reporting, the first character of the index is always C. Refer to the description
of the indices for Spec Reporting. These indices are also used for the Table Checker.
For project and interference reporting, the first character of the index is always D.
Refer to the description of the indices for Project and Interference Reporting.
[Rows/Page]
This setting is only required for output fields. It indicates the number of vertical spaces
(lines) in which to repeat the field contents on a given page. For example, a setting of 20
reserves 20 lines starting from a given row for use in placing the field contents (dependent on
spacing).
This does not take into account the extended fields due to exceeded field length.
This is NOT the total number of times that the field is repeated (that value is based on number
of occurrences for the specified attribute); it is only the vertical space allotted for repeating the
field on a page.
240
[Spacing]
This setting is only required for output fields. It indicates how much space (in rows) is
allowable between repeated fields. This is useful for reserving space for extended fields due
to exceeded field length.
(Rows/Page)/Spacing = the number of times an output field can appear on a page. For
example, if Rows/Page=40 and Spacing = 2, 20 occurrences of the specified attribute are
placed on a page (until the number of occurrences is reached).
Optional Report Type Line
8. Reporting
There is an optional line that will determine the type of report the format record creates. It
must be the first line of the format file when used. This line contains an integer variable that
corresponds to a name in the standard note type 1720 in the Standard Note Library. You can
modify the standard note type 1720 to add report types. For instance, the following line
would define the report type as Piping Components MTO Report:
report_type=689
8.5.3 Output Fields

Most report formats involve reporting multiple variables for a given component. This is
accomplished by using output fields (Field_Type = 2) with the necessary index numbers.
Each field is processed independently of the other fields on the report; there are no safeguards
to assure that information in different fields corresponds to the same item. Therefore, you are
responsible for placing these fields in such a way that the orders match in the report. To
ensure that items match, you should make sure that the same number of common items are
reported on each page. The Rows/Page divided by the Spacing determines the number of
times an output field can appear on a page. Therefore, all the common fields should use
identical settings for Rows/Page and Spacing.
The Spacing enables you to reserve space for extended fields due to exceeded field length.
For example, if you use a Field length of 20 for a field which may be up to 50 characters long,
you should set the spacing at 3 to leave adequate space for any extended fields.
If there is no data for the specified output field(s) on a page, that page will not
be printed.
241
________________
8.5.4 Sample Format Files

Different format files are used by the system to generated specific types of reports. The
following sections explain all of the delivered sample format files, their delivery locations,
and what type of report the generate. In some instances, report output is also included.
Sample MTO Report Format Files

The following files are provided in the product delivery in win32app\ingr\pdreport\sample
directory.
segment.fmt This report format includes piping segment data. It demonstrates

control sorting and output field looping (field functions 9 and 10).
This report format reports a list of piping segments grouped by the Model Builders
alphanumeric description id. The report includes all piping lines that are associated
with a specific Model Builder alphanumeric input file.
(report type = 687)
piping_a.fmt This report format includes data for piping components, pipes,
instrument components, gaskets, bolts, nuts, and welds. It demonstrates the use of
standard output fields.
This report includes each category of data in a fixed area of a repeated report page using
normal sorting and standard output fields (field function 4).
(report type = 689)
piping_b.fmt This report format includes data for piping components, pipes,
instrument components, gaskets, bolts, nuts, and welds. It demonstrates the technique
for grouping blocks of output fields on the same page of the report.
This report format reports data similar to piping_a.fmt. It differs only in that it
demonstrates another method to format the data on the repeated page of the report.
(report type = 689)
piping_c.fmt This report format includes data for piping components, pipes,
instrument components, gaskets, bolts, nuts, welds, pipe supports, implied piping
components, equipment, and nozzles. It demonstrates the use of different pages of
output within one report.
This report format reports data similar to piping_b.fmt with the addition of
pipe_supports, implied piping components, equipment, and nozzles. It uses page break
markers (field function 5) to break each category of data onto a different repeated page
of the report.
242
________________ Sample Format Files
(report type = 689)
piping_d.fmt This report format reports the material descriptions for piping
components, pipes, instrument components, pipe supports, gaskets, and bolts.
This report format uses identical report indices to create two columns to continue data
on the same report page. It also uses page breaks to separate the different categories of
data onto different repeated pages of the report.
(report type = 689)
piping_e.fmt This report format reports data similar to piping_c.fmt, but without
any equipment and nozzle data.
8. Reporting
This report format uses a continuous page marker (field function 6) to create a report
with no page boundaries and continuous output (typically used for creating a neutral file
format). It also demonstrates the use of report indices to create a summary of standard
notes used in the report.
report type = 689)
piping_f.fmt This report format includes data for piping components, pipes,
instrument components, gaskets, bolts, and pipe supports similar to piping_e.fmt.
Each category of data is grouped (using global control sorting) under a common line
number label for each page of output. It uses output field appending (field functions 7
and 8) to have the different categories of data reported on the same page and column of
output.
(report type = 689)
piping_g.fmt This report format includes data for piping components, pipes,
instrument components, gaskets, bolts, and pipe supports similar to piping_f.fmt with
the same line number grouping.
This report format uses output field looping (field functions 9 and 10) to utilize all of
the report page space available. The report includes a line number followed by all
components that are associated with that line number label with one or more line
number labels being reported per page, depending upon the amount of data and the
space available.
(report type = 689)
weight.fmt This report format includes weight and center of gravity data for piping
components, pipes, instrument components, gaskets, bolts, pipe supports, implied
piping components, and equipment.
The output is similar in format to piping_e.fmt and demonstrates the weight and cog
calculation reporting indices.
243
________________
(report type = 689)
equip_a.fmt This report format reports equipment data (including location data) and
nozzle data (including location and orientation data). It demonstrates the full range of
equipment and nozzle reporting indices.
(report type = 661)
weldno.fmt This format reports weld information, such as the weld number, type
and the first and second connect point NPD.
project_a.fmt This format reports project information such as the client and project
location and uses information from the Drawing Management Data table and the
Drawing Revision Data table for reporting.
Sample Spec Report Format Files

The following files are provided in the product delivered in the
win32app\pddata\sample\format directory.
piping_rdb.fmt This report format includes piping material class data and piping
commodity data from the Material Reference Database. It reports the partial (without
embedded commodity code labels) material descriptions.
(report type = 601)
tbl_chk_1.fmt This report format includes Table Checker data for one piping
material class. It reports the piping commodities with the dimension tables and Piping
Eden modules used, including a list of all entries read in the dimension tables.
This report also includes a list of all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules that
were required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference
Database. This report format is a combination of the following report formats
tbl_chk_2.fmt, tblk_chk_3.fmt, and tbl_chk_4.fmt. It provides full Table Checker
output for a specific piping materials class.
(report type = 601)
material class. It reports the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used by each
piping commodity in that piping materials class.
(report type = 601)
material class. It lists all entries read in dimension tables.
(report type = 601)
244
________________ Sample Format Files
material class. It includes a list of all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used
by the piping commodities in that piping materials class.
This report also includes a list of all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules that
were required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference
Database.
(report type = 601)
Sample Project Control Report Format Files
8. Reporting
The following examples are delivered in the win32app\pdprojec\sample directory.
model_mgt.fmt This format file reports model management data.
draw_mgt.fmt This format file reports orthographic drawing management data.
iso_mgt.fmt This format file reports isometric drawing management data.
iso_rev.fmt This format file reports isometric drawing revision management data.
Sample Interference Report Format File

The following example is delivered in the win32app\pdclash\sample directory.
clash_mgt.fmt This format file reports interference checker data.
Sample P&ID Consistency Check Report

Format File
The following example is delivered in the win32app\pddesign\sample directory.
pid_cmprpt.fmt This format file specifies the format of the title page and heading
for each page of the P&ID Consistency Check reports. The remainder of the report is
predefined by the product.
245
________________
8.6 What Happens When I Report On a

Component?
When you place a component the system writes the engineering data for the component to the
design database. For the gate valve placed in Chapter 4, the system writes information to the
Piping Segment Data table and the Piping Component Data table. When you create a Material
Take-Off (MTO) report using the Report Manager the system will use this data and
information in the project reference data for reporting.
In addition to the engineering data in the design database, PDS

3D uses the Material Description Library and the material data
in the Material Reference Database to provide material
descriptions for commodity items and specialty items.
Material Descriptions
The material description data is made up of four major parts:
1. Material Tables in the Material Reference Database - These database tables (211
and 212) contain commodity definitions which enable you to further classify the
commodity items defined in the Piping Job Specification. This database information
tends to be customer-specific.
Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)
The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item
that is dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and
schedule/thickness. It is used for miscellaneous reporting and interfaces to
material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawing extraction.
246
________________ What Happens When I Report On a Component?
Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)
The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific
commodity item that is dependent on both the commodity code and nominal
piping diameter range. This data is used for generating implied materials for
MTO reporting and material control. It is not used for welds, bolts, nuts, or
gaskets, but is reserved for other types of implied material, such as caps or stubs,
for a specific commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied
components of a commodity item (such as cap screws).
2. Short Material Description Library - This library contains the short bill-of-material
(BOM) descriptions for all piping commodity items and the description addenda for
taps. The short material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.
8. Reporting
3. Long Material Description Library - This library contains the long bill-of-material
descriptions for all piping commodity items. The long material descriptions can be up
to 500 characters in length.
4. Specialty Material Description Library - This Library contains the material

descriptions for any piping specialties, in-line instruments, or pipe supports which are
reported by MTO or material control. These material descriptions are job specific and
are accessed by the specialty items tag number. The specialty material descriptions
can be up to 240 characters in length.
The material description data in these files is used for reporting and material control and is not
required for the interactive placement of symbols in the model. This data is normally
accessed during a batch (non-interactive) process.
Commodity Codes
The system uses the commodity code as an index to access the descriptions in the material
description libraries. You can use the commodity code defined in the Piping Commodity
Specification Data table (Table 202 attribute 18) or a user-defined commodity code defined in
the Size-Dependent Material Data table (Table 211 attribute 7).
247
________________
The source of the commodity code and other processing options for reporting are defined for a
model with the Material Takeoff Options form of the Project Data Manager.
The commodity code represents that set of parameters that completely describe a commodity
item, exclusive of nominal piping diameter and thickness. The character length for the
commodity code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size
Dependent Data table of the database, or from the character length of the commodity code in
the Piping Commodity Data table of the database, depending on which is being used to access
the material descriptions.
The delivered commodity codes use a 10 character code to fully identify the item. The first
letter of the commodity code identifies the basic type of component, such as a valve or flange.
The remaining characters provide a detailed description of the component. The first character
designations are:
248
________________ What Happens When I Report On a Component?
B Flanged and Misc. Fittings Q Socket End Fittings

D Fire and Safety Components R Tubing Fittings
E Steam Specialties S Socketwelded Fittings
F Flanges T Threaded Fittings
G Flanged Specialties U Underground Fittings
H Strainers V Valves
M Misc. Wetted Components W Welded Fittings
N Misc. Non-Wetted Components X Gaskets
O Tubing and Hose Y Bolting
P Pipe
Examples
8. Reporting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
_____________________________
P A D A A B C A A E
P - Pipe
AD - Pipe, Plain Ends
AA - Seamless
BC - X-Strong (s-xs)
AAE - ASTM A106 Gr. B
V A A B A H C C A A
V - Valve
A - Gate Valve
A - CL150
B - Raised Face Flanged Ends
A - Carbon Steel
H - Trim 8
CC - Crane 47
AA - Blank
Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a complete listing of the
delivered commodity codes.
You can use the delivered commodity codes or create your own naming scheme. Regardless
of the scheme used, all the codes must be unique and there must be an exact match between
the commodity code specified for an item in the Material Reference Database and commodity
codes used to define the material descriptions in the Material Description Library.
Implied Data
When the system creates a bill of materials for the elements in a model it lists both the items
physically defined in the model and any implied items which are associated with the physical
items. Implied materials can be defined in any of the following ways.
249
________________
Mating Implied Data (gaskets, bolts, and welds)
During reporting, the system scans the components and their relationship to determine
any mating implied material. The system uses a set of rules to determine the implied
materials based on the end conditions of mating components. These rules are described
in detail in the Report Manager (PD_Report) Reference Guide.
Item definitions for mating implication such as bolts and gaskets are defined in the
Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (pdtable_202) of the
Specification/Material Reference Database.
Spec Implied Data
An asterix (*) in front of a commodity code in the Piping Commodity Specification

Data (PCD) indicates that there is another line item in the PCD for the implied
component. For example, a lap joint flange and stub end. The lap joint flange is placed
in the model but the stub end is not. However, the stub end will show up in reports.
This is a Parent/Child relationship with a one-to-one relation.
Parent = option number

Child = 5000 + parent option number
Table 212 Implied Data
A plus (+) in front of a commodity code in the PCD tells the software to look in table
212 for that commodity code. This method indicates a primary component which has
one or more associated implied components.
This is a Parent/Child relationship with a one-to-many relation.
Commodity codes with neither an * or a + prefix in the PCD, indicate a commodity

item that has no associated implied components.
Report Output
The following is a sample report using the format file piping_a.fmt. It reports on a very
simple pipeline containing the component examples covered in Chapter 4 and the connecting
pipes.
250
________________
What Happens When I Report On a Component?
8. Reporting
251
________________
8.7 Material Takeoff Reporting (Report

Manager)
Material Takeoff reporting (with implied materials) generates reports on PDS piping and
equipment models involving data from the Design Database, Reference Database, Project
Database, and Material Description Libraries. This type of report also includes implied
mating data, such as bolts, gaskets, and welds by determining the connectivity of the piping
and equipment. Format files used in this type of report primarily use A and B prefixed
indices. This report is generated using Report Manager.
The active Piping Materials Class must be defined for a model for MTO
processing to work. Before creating an MTO report for a model or set of
models, the Piping Materials Class should be set in the active segment data for
each model and the setting should be saved with File Design.
The sample format files for creating MTO reports are: segment.fmt, piping_a.fmt through
piping_g.fmt, weight.fmt, equip_a.fmt, and weldno.fmt and are delivered in the
win32app\pdreport\sample directory.
Sample MTO Format (piping_g.fmt)

report_type=689 ! Piping Components MTO Report
1,1,1,-13,1,1,Date/Time :
1,1,14,-23,1,5
1,1,50,-40,1,1,PDS MTO REPORT
1,1,120,-6,1,1,Page:
1,1,127,-3,2,4
2,3,10,-40,1,1,Corporate Headquarters
2,4,10,-40,1,1,Intergraph Corporation
2,5,10,-40,1,1,Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
2,6,10,-40,1,1,(205)730-2000
2,3,90,-20,1,2,B**Q5
2,3,110,-20,1,2,B**Q9
2,4,90,-20,1,2,B**Q6
2,5,90,-20,1,2,B**Q7
2,6,90,-20,1,2,B**Q8
1,8,1,-25,1,-1,Commodity Code
1,8,27,-16,1,-1,Qty/Length
1,8,45,-10,1,-1,1st Size
1,8,57,-10,1,-1,2nd Size
1,8,69,-63,1,-1,Material Description
9
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,BI2G1,45,2
7
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,BB2G1,45,2
7
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,B*I2G1,45,2
7
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,BT1G1,45,2
7
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,BX1G1,45,2
7
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,B**K2G1,45,2
7
4,10,55,-50,LINE NUMBER: [A30],-2,B*S2G1,45,2
8
4,12,1,-25,1,2,BG8S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,2,2,BS,45,2
4,12,45,-10,1,2,BN49S3,45,2
252
________________ Material Takeoff Reporting (Report Manager)
4,12,57,-10,1,2,BN-49S4,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,BM1S5,45,2
7
4,12,1,-25,1,2,BA12S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,1,2,BA22,45,2
4,12,45,-10,1,2,BA7S3,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,BF1S4,45,2
7
4,12,1,-25,1,2,B*G2S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,2,2,B*O,45,2
4,12,45,-10,1,2,B*L55S3,45,2
4,12,57,-10,1,2,B*L-55S4,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,B*K1S5,45,2
7
4,12,1,-25,1,2,BT13S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,2,2,BV,45,2
4,12,45,-10,1,2,BT2S3,45,2
4,12,57,-10,1,2,BT23,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,BT21S4,45,2
7
8. Reporting
4,12,1,-25,1,2,BX12S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,2,2,BZ,45,2
4,12,45,-10,1,2,BX4S3,45,2
4,12,57,-10,1,2,BX5S4,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,BX20S5,45,2
7
4,12,1,-25,1,2,B**J7S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,1,2,B**O,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,B**M1S3,45,2
7
4,12,1,-25,1,2,B*P12S2,45,2
4,12,27,-16,2,2,B*R,45,2
4,12,45,-10,1,2,B*S11S3,45,2
4,12,69,63,1,2,B*U1S4,45,2
10
5
1,3,1,-13,1,1,Date/Time :
1,3,14,-23,1,5
1,3,50,-40,1,1,PDS MTO REPORT
1,3,120,-6,1,1,Page:
1,3,127,-3,2,4
1,11,1,-34,1,-1,GRAND TOTALS
1,13,1,-15,1,-1,Components
1,13,20,-15,1,-1,Pipes
1,13,40,-15,1,-1,Instruments
1,13,60,-15,1,-1,Gaskets
1,13,80,-15,1,-1,Bolts
1,13,100,-15,1,-1,Pipe Supports
1,14,1,-15,2,2,BST
1,14,20,-15,2,2,BRT
1,14,40,-15,2,2,B*OT
1,14,60,-15,2,2,BVT
1,14,80,-15,2,2,BZT
1,14,100,-15,2,2,B*RT
Sample MTO Output

Date/Time : 15-Apr-93 PDS MTO REPORT Page: 1
Corporate Headquarters PDS Project tcproj

Intergraph Corporation tc101
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001 RoXXon Corp.
(205)730-2000 Nth Projector
Commodity Code Qty/Length 1st Size 2nd Size Material Description

______________ __________ ________ ________ ____________________
LINE NUMBER: P403-1/2IN-1C0031-N

________________________________
253
________________
POCAAAOAAE 1 1/2IN 1/2IN Nipple, PE, S-160, 3" long, ASTM-A106-B
PPCAAAOAAE 1 1/2IN 1/2IN Nipple, PE, S-160, 6" long, ASTM-A106-B
VAUHAHGAAA 2 1/2IN 1/2IN Gate valve, CL800, SWE/FTE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith
800
LINE NUMBER: P403-3/4IN-1C0031-N

________________________________
POCAAAOAAE 9 3/4IN 3/4IN Nipple, PE, S-160, 3" long, ASTM-A106-B
TPAZVZZAAA 7 3/4IN - Plug, MTE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.11
VAUHAHGAAA 9 3/4IN 3/4IN Gate valve, CL800, SWE/FTE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith
800
38-PI-6 1 3/4IN 3/4IN *
39-PI-9 1 3/4IN 3/4IN *
LINE NUMBER: P403-3IN-1C0031-N

______________________________
FAAABAWAAA 2 3IN 3IN Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-STD bore
XDAABZZQSG 1 3" - Gasket, CL150, G653, 0.125" thk, 304 spiral wnd, graph filled,
CS center ring, API-601
YZZZHZZFFF 4 5/8" 3 3/4" B31, ASTM-A193-B7 studs w/ASTM-A194-2H hvy hex nuts

______________________________
1 4IN 4IN *
VAABAHCCAA 1 4IN 4IN Gate valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A216-WCB, trim 8, Crane
47
VBABAHCFAA 1 4IN 4IN Globe valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A216-WCB, trim 8,
Crane 143
WAAAAAWAAA 2 4IN 4IN 90 deg LR elbow, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WRBAAAWAAA 2 4IN 3IN Eccentric reducer, S-STD x S-STD bore, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB,
ANSI-B16.9
WTAAAAWAAA 1 4IN 4IN Tee, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9

______________ __________ ________ ________ ____________________

______________________________
PAAAAAWAAA 4 8 9/16" 4IN Pipe, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A53-B Type S
YZZZHZZFFF 32 5/8" 3 3/4" B31, ASTM-A193-B7 studs w/ASTM-A194-2H hvy hex nuts
supp2 1 4IN *

______________________________
FGPBBAWAAA 2 6IN 6IN Orifice flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.36, WN, one
0.5" SWE tap, S-STD bore
GJGABZZADA 1 6IN 6IN Spectacle blank, CL150, RFTBE, ASTM-A516-70, API-590Z1, 0.75
thk
VAABAHCCAA 4 6IN 6IN Gate valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A216-WCB, trim 8, Crane
47
VCABAHOBAA 2 6IN 6IN Check valve, CL150, RFFE, BC, swing, ASTM-A216-WCB, trim 8,
Pacific 180
WAAAAAWAAA 9 6IN 6IN 90 deg LR elbow, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
254
________________ Material Takeoff Reporting (Report Manager)
WADAAAWAAA 1 6IN 6IN 45 deg LR elbow, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
WOAAAAWAFA 1 6IN 4IN Weldolet, S-STD x S-STD, BE, ASTM-A105
WOBSABQAFA 4 6IN 3/4IN Sockolet, CL3000, BE/SWE, ASTM-A105
WRAAAAWAAA 4 6IN 4IN Concentric reducer, S-STD x S-STD bore, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB,
ANSI-B16.9
WTAAAAWAAA 3 6IN 6IN Tee, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A234-WPB, ANSI-B16.9
PAAAAAWAAA 131 1 3/16" 6IN Pipe, S-STD, BE, ASTM-A53-B Type S
XDABBZZQSG 1 6" - Gasket, CL300, G653, 0.125" thk, 304 spiral wnd, graph filled,
YZZZHZZFFF 80 3/4" 4" B31, ASTM-A193-B7 studs w/ASTM-A194-2H hvy hex nuts
YZZZHZZFFF 20 3/4" 5" B31, ASTM-A193-B7 studs w/ASTM-A194-2H hvy hex nuts
8. Reporting
supp1 1 6IN *

______________ __________ ________ ________ ____________________

______________________________
supp3 1 6IN *
GRAND TOTALS
____________
Components Pipes Instruments Gaskets Bolts Pipe Supports

__________ _____ ___________ _______ _____ _____________
87 19 2 18 136 3
255
________________
8.8 Understanding Implied Items

This section discusses the various types of implied items and a few miscellaneous items and
how they are reported. It also covers some of the features within the PDS suite of products
that are outside of the Report Manager module.
When reporting on components, there are sometimes additional parts necessary to complete
that component that are not represented graphically in the piping model or stored in the Piping
Design database. These additional components are mating, spec, or table implied items.
If an implied item is part of an implied connection, it is called a mating implied item.

Otherwise, the naming conventions for implied items are defined by the location where the
implied item data is retrieved. The system retrieves these implied items from either the Piping
Component Specification Data Table (pdtable_202) or from Piping Commodity Implied
Material Data Table (pdtable_212). The following sections explains the mating, spec, and
table implied items and how data is retrieved for each:
8.8.1 Mating Implied Items

Mating implied items are found by the system while scanning related mating components and
defining the items necessary to complete those connections. The following items termed
mating implied.
Bolts
Gaskets
Nuts
Welds
The Material Takeoff Options form is part of the Project Administrator module, and its
setting greatly affect the way mating implied items are reported.
For more information on mating implied item reporting see the Material
Takeoff Options section.
8.8.2 * Spec Implied Items

Commodity codes prefixed by an * in Material Description Code field in the Piping Job
Specification indicate a primary component that has one associated spec implied item.
The definition of the spec implied item has the same search parameters as the primary
component, except in the following instances:
256
________________ Understanding Implied Items
The value for the option attribute of the spec implied component is equal to 5000
plus the option value for the primary component.
The definition of the spec implied component can be divided into several NPD
ranges.
The output parameters of the spec implied component may differ from those of the
primary component in the following instances:
Only the primary component is included in the model depiction; the spec implied
component only appears in reports.
Only the primary component is displayed on an isometric drawing; the spec implied
8. Reporting
component only appears in the materials list.
The commodity codes prefixed by an * are used to define:
Stub-ends used in conjunction with lap, slip-on, and plate flanges.
Jacketed components when the outer jackets are obtained independently of the
internal components.
* Spec Implied Example

Both the primary component and the implied item in the following Piping Job Specification
example would be reported:
! AABBCC Green CP Red CP- Commodity Model Geo Mat Wt FF
! Code Opt From To Prp Rating Sc/Th TS From To Prp Rating Sc/Th TS code TMx Code Std Mod Grd Cd FC Nte lng
PIPING 1 2 6 301 - S-STD 5 - - - - - - *PAAAAAWAAA - PIPE 100 100 142 52 15 - 240
PIPING 5001 2 6 301 - S-STD 5 - - - - - - newcommcode - PIPE 100 100 142 52 15 - -
8.8.3 + Table Implied Items

Commodity codes prefixed by a + in the Commodity Code field in the Piping Job
Specification indicate the primary component has one or more associated table implied items.
The system searches for the definition of the implied item in the Piping Commodity Implied
Material Data (pdtable_212), which contains the commodity code of the primary component,
the applicable NPD range, and the commodity code of the table implied components.
To use this option, pdtable_212 must be loaded.
The output parameters of the table implied item may differ from those of the primary
component in the following situations:
If only the primary component is included in the model depiction, the table implied
items appear only in the report.
257
________________
If the primary component is displayed on an isometric drawing, The materials list

only includes the short description of the primary component. The descriptions of
the table implied items are displayed as notes on the drawing, pointing to the
primary component. The text for these notes is derived from the short descriptions
of the applicable commodity codes. The short description can contain $ symbols to
force the text to a new line in the label.
The commodity codes prefixed by a + are used to define the following items:
Cap screws for valves requiring caps.
Safety covers for required components.
Housings for required components.
+ Table Implied Example

First, notice the + indicating a table implied item in a line taken from the Piping Job
Specification.
6Q2C01 1 3 24 21 CL150 NREQD 5 - - 421 CL150 MATCH 5 +FAAABAWAAA - FWN 35 - 150 52 15 -
Secondly, notice the table entries that are related to the primary component,
FAAABAWAAA, in pdtable_212. All of the related items, which include the first three items
in the table would be reported:
! Implied data for table 212

Single_Spacing
Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
!Comm Code GFr GTo RFr RTo Imp Code Qty FC Note
!
FAAABAWAAA 2 12 0 0 IMPFLG2A 1.5 7 -
FAAABAWAAA 2 12 0 0 IMPFLG2B 0.5 7 -
FAAABAWAAA 2 12 0 0 IMPFLG2C 1.0 7 -
VAABAHCCAA 2 2 0 0 IMPVAL2A 0.5 7 -
VAABAHCCAA 2 2 0 0 IMPVAL2B 2.5 7 -
PAAAAAWAAA 2 2 0 0 IMPPIP2 1.0 7 -
WAAAAAWAAA 2 2 0 0 IMPELB2 2.0 7 -
WRAAAAWAAA 3 12 2 10 IMPRED 1.0 7 -
258
________________ Material Takeoff Options
8.9 Material Takeoff Options

The Material Takeoff Options form of the Project Data Manager specifies the source of
commodity information, units for bolt length and diameter, and specifies item names used to
reference a commodity item in the Piping Job Specification and Graphic Commodity Library.
These options are essential to material takeoff reporting.
Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on the Project Data
Manager. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for information on the stud
table, bolt length calculations, and the bolt commodity code table.
8. Reporting
Operating Sequence
1. Specify the bolt information.
Bolt Length Roundoff Select the option for the means to determine the reported
bolt length.
Preferred Bolt Length Table - the system uses the preferred bolt length table.
Bolt Roundoff Factor - the system rounds up the calculated length by the specified
factor.
No Roundoff - the exact length is used.
Length Calculation Select the method to be used in calculating bolt length. The
bolt length is read from the stud table. The table name can be determined using the
rating and table suffix (Almost Precise) or using termination type, rating, and table
suffix (Precise). This also affects bolt lengths for lap joint flanges.
259
________________
Bolt Commodity Code Select the method to be used in determining the commodity
code for bolts for use in material take-off. Piping Job Specification or Bolt
Commodity Code Table.
Bolt Diameter Units Select the system of units for bolt diameter.
Bolt Length Units Select the system of units for bolt length.
2. Gasket Search
Select this field to toggle the setting between Default or Alternate.
3. Field Fit Length
Select this field to toggle the setting between Off or On. If this field is On, the system
displays a field to input the Field Fit Length Table name.
4. Commodity Code
Select this field to toggle the setting between Size Independent or Size Dependent.
For a detailed description and graphical examples of how these options

work, see the Size Dependent and Independent Reporting section.
When the Size Dependent option is enabled, the

system provides two additional options.
Source of Implied Data This option specifies the source of the commodity code for
reporting implied data from the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table.
The default option (System Commodity Code) tells the system to use the commodity
code defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (pdtable_202 attribute
18).
The Size-Dependent Commodity Code option tells the system to use the commodity
code defined in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table
(pdtable_211 attribute 7).
Source of Material Description This option specifies the source of the commodity
code for reporting a components material description.
The default option (System Commodity Code) tells the system to use the commodity
code defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (pdtable_202 attribute
18). This option will result in a smaller Material Description Library.
260
________________ Material Takeoff Options
The Size-Dependent Commodity Code option tells the system to use the commodity
code defined in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table
(pdtable_211 attribute 7). This option will result in a larger Material Description
Library.
5. Key in the commodity item names to be used for reporting mating implied materials.
Gasket Commodity Name

Bolt Commodity Name
Nut Commodity Name
6. Key in the Eden Module names.
8. Reporting
Bolt Data Module This field defines the name of the Eden Module which
determines the values for the bolt diameter, the number of bolts per mating, and the bolt
extension.
Flange Data Module This field defines the name of the Eden Module which defines
values for flange outside diameter, thickness, and seat depth.
7. Key in the bolt length values. The display of these fields is dependent on the setting for
Bolt Roundoff Option.
Bolt Length Table This table defines the low and high range for calculated bolt
lengths and corresponding preferred or purchased lengths of the bolt. This field is only
used if Preferred Bolt Length Table is the active Bolt Roundoff Option.
Bolt Length Roundoff Factor This field defines the value for the bolt roundoff
factor in subunits. This value is only used if Bolt Roundoff Factor is the active Bolt
Roundoff Option.
8. Select Confirm () to accept any changes to the Material Takeoff options.
261
________________
8.10 Labels in Material Descriptions

The material descriptions for commodity items can be loaded in the Material Description
library via neutral files. The neutral file includes a unique Commodity Code followed by at
least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes. It also contains the implied
material descriptions associated with a commodity item.
The following shows a portion of the neutral file used to load the Short Material Descriptions.
! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS
! Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 14:16:58 1992
! Processed Library /usr/newpipe/refdata/us_shbom.l
!Cmdty Code ====================================Description========================================

CHAIN_1251 Chainwheel operator each with [424] of total chain length for valve with tag no [402]
DAABAXAABE Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem
lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21
DAABAXAABF Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel
stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle, Stang BB0309-21
DACBAXABBC Monitor, CL150 FFFE, elevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, [427],
w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports, Stang BB2999-
DACBAXABBD Monitor, CL300 FFFE, elevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, [427],
w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561
DBAAAXBAAB Fire hydrant, CL125 FFFE, 5" size, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle, two 2.5" hose nozzles
equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B
DCBGDXEADA Hose rack, 300#, FTE, w/valve, wall mount, rt hand w/100 ft hose & fog nozzle, Powhatan 30-333
DDAXCJDAAA Spray sprinkler, MTE, filled cone w/rupture disc, 304, Grinnell, Mulsifyre Projector S-1
FAAAAAWAAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAAAAWWAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, cement lined, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABADIIA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAABADIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAABADNPF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAABAOAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAAABAOABB Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAAABAOFFH Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAAABAWAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWABB Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWFFH Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWFFL Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWGFD Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWIIA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWNPF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABBDAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore
FAAADAOAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAAADAOFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAAADAWAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAAADAWFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAAADBDFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-XXS bore
FAABBADIIA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAABBADIIB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAABBADIIF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAABBAOAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAOABB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAOFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAOFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAWAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWABB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWFFL Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWIIA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWIIB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWIIF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWNPF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBBDAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore
FAABDADIIJ Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-80S bore
262
________________ Labels in Material Descriptions
FAABDAOAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAABDAOFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAABDAWAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAABDAWFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAABDAWFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAABDAWIIJ Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBADIIA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAADBADIIF Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAADBAOAAA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAADBAOABE Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAADBAWAAA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWABE Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWFFC Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWFFH Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWFFL Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWIIA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
The following conventions are used to identify different types of information in the material
8. Reporting
descriptions:
All information to the left of the carat () is used in MTO reporting and isometric
extraction, but is excluded from Spec reporting.
|| Information appearing in |Pipes| indicates information for Spec descriptions

only. This information is excluded from the descriptions for MTO reporting and
isometric extraction.
[] Information appearing in [brackets] indicates a label type from the Label

Description Library. The system uses the label format to determine the
information to be included in the material description for MTO reporting and
isometric extraction. The label information is never used in Spec reporting.
The following label types are provided in the product delivery:
Label No Data in Label Source of Data

401 Piping sch/thk 1 Pipe
403 Component Sch/thk 1 Component
405 Component sch/thk 1 b Component
407 Component sch/thk 2 Component
409 Component sch/thk 2 b Component
411 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 Component
413 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 b Component
415 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 Component
417 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 b Component
421 Bonnet length Component
423 Reinforcing weld size Component
425 Pad width x pad thick Component
Attributes for mating implied items, specifically bolts and gaskets, are not stored in the
Design Database (dd_projname) where attributes for independent components are stored. You
can insert labels in Material Description Library for bolt and gasket entries, but these labels
must be classified as Piping Component Data labels when they are created.
Although data for bolts and gaskets is not recorded in the Piping Component Data Table
(pdtable_34_x) in the Piping Design Database (dd_projname), bolt and gasket labels are
classified as Piping Component Data labels. The system retrieves the bolt and gasket
information for reporting using related attributes in the Piping Component Data Table
(pdtable_202).
263
________________
Although all of the attributes for piping components are available when you define a bolt or
gasket label using the Piping Component Data labels option, only the following attributes
contain data that is pertinent to bolt and gasket reporting. The following list displays the
form-attribute/table-attribute relationship which define what data is actually reported from the
Piping Component Data Table (pdtable_202):
Form Attributes Related (pdtable_202) Attributes

commodity_name commodity_name
option_code option_code
maximum_temp maximum_temp
cp_1_nom_pip_diam gcp_from_nom_diam
cp_1_end_prep gcp_to_nom_diam
cp_1_outside_diam gcp_end_prep
cp_1_rating gcp_rating
cp_1_sch_thk gcp_sch_thk
table_suffix_green gcp_table_suffix
cp_2_nom_pipe_diam rcp_from_nom_diam
cp_2_outside_diam rcp_to_nom_diam
cp_2_end_prep rcp_end_prep
cp_2_rating rcp_rating
cp_2_sch_thk rcp_sch_thk
table_suffix_red rcp_table_suffix
commodity_code commodity_code
model_code model_code
PDS_sort_code PDS_sort_code
bend_radius modifier
geometric_standard geometric_standard
weight_code weight_code
fabrication_cat fabrication_cat
materials_grade materials_grade
standard_note_no_a standard_note_no_a
standard_note_no_b standard_note_no_b
A Label Description Library is delivered in win32app\pdshell\lib\labels.l and should be edited

to suit the needs of your project.
264
________________ Create Label Attribute Data
8.10.1 Create Label Attribute Data

The Label Description Library Manager is used to create and revise label data for the PDS
3D modules. The Create Label Attribute Data form allows you to create and define a label.
The Line and Item fields are used to define the attributes that make up the label and the order
of the attributes within the label.
8. Reporting
Set the option at the upper left of the form.
Insert Data used to add a line or item to the label description.
Delete Data used to delete a selected line or item from the label description.
Edit Data used to revise a selected line or item in the label description.
Insert Data
1. Set the option to Insert Data.
2. Set the toggle to Insert after or Insert before.
3. Select Line or Item to Insert Data
Select a line field to create a new line (before or after) the selected line.
OR
Select an item field to create a new item in the current line (before or after) the selected
item.
265
________________
The system activates a form that displays the Attribute Data Types. The following form
illustrates the display for a drawing view specific label.
4. Select Option
Select Piping Component Data to define the attribute data type for the bolt or gasket
label.
The system displays the attributes for the selected data type.
266
________________ Create Label Attribute Data
8. Reporting
5. Enter Data
Select the attribute to be reported from the form. The system sets the Format Data
automatically. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (if
applicable).
All of the attributes that apply to gaskets and bolts are listed in the Labels in Material
Descriptions section.
OR
For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text
to be entered by the user at label creation.
OR
Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label.
OR
Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between
attributes.
6. Repeat the previous step to add additional attribute text information. This allows you to
combine attribute values and pre-formatted text.
You can only define one user-defined key-in in a specific label.
267
________________
7. Select one of the Optional Data options to specify a modifier to the active format.
Master Units = MicroStation master units, Sub Units = MicroStation sub units.
8. Select Confirm () to accept the specified attribute data.
Delete Data
1. Set the option to Delete Data.
2. Select the line or item to be deleted.
3. Select Confirm () to delete the highlighted line or item. When you select a line, the
system deletes all the associated items.
Edit Data
1. Set the option to Edit Data.
2. Select Item to Edit
Select the item to be revised.
The system displays the attributes definition form for the selected item. The active
setting is highlighted or shown in the display fields.
3. Select an attribute from the form to change the type of data.
OR
Select the Format Data option. You can modify the total length and the number of
decimal places (if applicable).
OR
For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text
to be entered by the user at label creation.
OR
Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label.
OR
Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between
attributes.
4. Repeat the previous steps to edit additional items.
THEN
Select Confirm () to accept the edits.

________________ Extracting Isometric Drawings
9. Extracting Isometric Drawings

The PDS Isometric Extraction Software creates piping isometric drawings from 3D piping
models created by the Piping Designer.
Extraction
9. Isometric
269
________________
The software consists of two principal components:
Intergraph 3D software packages which create input for ISOGEN and perform other
functions necessary in final drawing creation.
ISOGEN, which draws the piping isometric and places it in a MicroStation design file
and
The software allows you to extract isometrics from a 3D plant model: single isometrics
interactively or multiple isometrics in a batch mode.
The ISOGEN software is designed to be flexible because drawing practices vary from one
company to another. The following features of Intergraphs isometric extraction package
allow you to specify drawing format:
User-controlled ISOGEN option switches
The capability to use an alternate or foreign text
A large set of Intergraph option switches
User-controlled attribute breaks shown on drawings
A flexible method for generating notes
Attribute-driven symbology (solid or dotted lines)
User-defined component symbology
User-controlled mapping of attributes to the title block.
In addition to the isometric drawing, the software also generates several nongraphic outputs,
the most important of which is a completely user-definable MTO neutral file. This neutral file
is extremely useful for those who want to combine a material control system with Intergraphs
3D modeling software.
The above features are collectively referred to as software customization and are dealt with at
length in the PDS ISOGEN Interface Reference Guide.
270
________________ Overview of Isometric Extraction
9.1 Overview of Isometric Extraction

This section outlines the software components and how they are organized for interactively
extracting isometrics.
Extraction
9. Isometric
9.1.1 The Intergraph Interface to ISOGEN
The core software module in isometric extraction (both interactive and batch) is the ISOGEN
interface. This program reads data from the 3D model files and generates an input file for
ISOGEN. ISOGEN knows nothing of PDS or any of its files. It reads only the input file
created for it by the ISOGEN interface. While ISOGEN is primarily responsible for
generating the drawing graphics (including dimensioning) the ISOGEN interface is
responsible for most everything else including note generation, recognition of attribute
changes, defining which symbols to use and so on.
271
________________
The primary input to the ISOGEN interface is an ASCII file named pdsidf.dat. The interface
reads from this file the piping and equipment models involved, the output isometric file name,
and identification of all of the pipelines in the drawing. The interface also reads in data from
the options file.
The options file consists of a collection of switches, options and tables that gives you some
control over what the ISOGEN interface puts in its output file (called the intermediate data
file or idf) and therefore what appears in the final drawing.
Once this data is read in, the interface collects from the model files all of the components that
make up the piping network. Data from the components is then used to form an internal data
structure which represents the network. Finally, this network is traversed (the software traces
a path through the piping network) and records are generated in the idf. The order of the
records in the idf is in the order of the network traversal. Drawing notes and other features
such as bill of material information are dealt with component by component as the network is
traversed.
If the components in the piping models are not properly connected or other problems exist, the
internal data structure will not be properly built and isometric extraction will fail. The HITS
report can help you to find problems in the piping model and tell you when the interface
software is not working properly.
9.1.2 ASCII to Binary Conversion

The Intergraph interface to ISOGEN creates an ASCII data file containing the input to
ISOGEN. Since ISOGEN requires the input data to be in binary format, a program named
ISOA_BGEN is run to convert this ASCII data file to binary. ISOA_BGEN creates the binary
output file FOR036.# which IZOD2 uses to generate the isometric drawing.
9.1.3 ISOGEN
ISOGEN takes the binary input file and generates graphics in an 2D MicroStation design file.
The graphics consist of the completed isometric drawing. ISOGEN can also generate several
nongraphic outputs, including:
An ISOGEN MTO neutral file
A parts list (bill of material)
A cut pipe report
A component VRS sheet number file
The parts list file contains the same bill of material that is shown on the isometric drawing. It
is possible to turn the drawing bill of material off and attach the printed ASCII file to the
drawing instead. The cut pipe report, which shows the length of each piece of pipe in the line,
can be useful. The component VRS sheet number file is used by the batch extraction software
and is discussed elsewhere.
272
________________ Batch Software Organization
9.2 Batch Software Organization

This section provides an overview of the batch extraction software components and
organization. The purpose of this section is to explain to software support personnel how the
software works so that problems can be tracked down and reported.
The batch extraction software is driven by an executable (pdsidf) and a script file (batch.sh).
When you submit a batch job using the Schedule Batch Job form the batch extraction is
submitted to a batch queue named PDisocreate. This queue is created with a job limit of 1
and a priority of 16. You can change these parameters as needed.
In order to run batch isos, a new file located in /usr/bin called pd_iso.sh must define locations
for required software. This script is executed from the batch queue and allows the batch
extraction process to run on a node other than the one from which it was submitted. The
following four variables must be exported:
PD_SHELL
PD_ISO
PD_ISOGEN
RIS_PARAMETERS
Extraction
9. Isometric
The above variables have the following default settings after the product is installed.
PD_SHELL = /usr/ip32/pdshell/
PD_ISO = /usr/ip32/pdiso/
PD_ISOGEN = /usr/ip32/pdisogen/
RIS_PARAMETERS = /usr/ip32/ris/parameters
If the locations for the above variables are different from the default locations. The file
/usr/bin/pd_iso.sh must be edited so that it reflects the current variable location.
9.2.1 The Batch Job Input File

The input to the batch procedure is an ASCII data file generated by the Batch Environment
called the Batch Job Input File. This file is structured as shown.
273
________________
Figure 9 - 1. Batch input file data structure
The first record in the file contains a file format version number and the name of the Batch
Data File from which the Batch Job Input file was generated. The software checks the version
number to see if it matches the software version number, and, if it does match, passes the
Batch Data File name on to other software modules as needed.
The second record is called an option record. The option record contains all of the batch
processing options and revision block data that was entered into the BATCH form. Each
option is separated from the others by at least one space. This record contains an exclamation
point (!) in column 1 which flags it as an option record.
The third record holds the name of the default set which was specified in the Create Batch Job
Input form. This record also contains an exclamation point in column 1.
Subsequent records, which initially contain a space in column 1, hold the area and primary
line name for an isometric drawing which will be extracted. After the line is extracted, it is
marked by an asterisk (*) in column 1 to indicate that it has been processed.
The drawing records can be repeated any number of times in the batch job input file. Each
time you select the Accept button from the Create Batch Job Input form, you write out a set of
drawing records to the batch input file. An example batch job input file is shown below.
Figure 9 - 2. Example Batch Job Input File
When a batch iso job is submitted using the Schedule Batch Job form, the batch job input file
name is passed to the pdsidf executable as a parameter. The system then reads the batch job
input file and drawing creation begins.
274
________________ Batch Software Organization
9.2.2 Line Processing (pdsidf)

Given the options from the batch input file and the identification of the line, two files are
created, seed.dat and pdsidf.dat. These are the same two files that are created during
interactive extraction.
The Project database is accessed to obtain the list of model files, secondary pipeline names,
the seed file names, the options file for the piping area, the output file directory, the iso design
file name and the extraction number for the drawing.
The two files produced are different from the ones produced for interactive extraction. In
pdsidf.dat, the first line name in the line name list is followed by a backslash and the piping
area name. Following the line list is a record that contains the default set name. Next is a
record that contains batch processing options. The last record contains the extraction number
for the drawing.
skiso5
skiso4
skiso6
skiso7
*skiso3
40eqp01
40eqp00
Extraction
9. Isometric
pdssk:h:\proj\iso\isofiles\380105wc.i*
380105\skiso\1
proj
N Y Y N * * Y * * 04-Aug-1998 *
13
1 0
In SEED.DAT, the seed iso design file name is followed by records containing the plot
request file name, the output file directory, the output iso file name, extraction number and
number of sections.
pdssk:h:\proj\iso\ref\isoc.def
pdssk:h:\proj\iso\ref\isoc.sed
pdssk:h:\proj\iso\ref\isoc_sml.i
pdssk:h:\proj\iso\isofiles
380105
13
1.fi
9.2.3 The ISOGEN Interface

The ISOGEN interface performs the same function in batch extraction as in interactive
extraction. It generates an Intermediate Data File (IDF), which is the input to ISOGEN. In
addition to the IDF the interface may also produce an mto neutral file and three files
containing text for the drawing title block.
275
________________
9.2.4 ISOGEN
Isometrics generated by the batch software are always created one sheet to a design file. The
iso design file name is passed to the interface as name.i*. Therefore, the first sheet will be in
a file with the extension .i01, the second in .i02 and so on.
When isometrics are created in batch, you must set Intergraph options block word 4 to 1. This
causes ISOGEN to create a file that identifies which sheet each component in the line is
drawn on. This file (called the sheet data file) is used downstream to split up the mto neutral
file by sheet and also to prepare the segment summary table for each isometric sheet.
9.2.5 Plotting
After drawings are created in batch they can be plotted with the IP_IPLOT plotting software.
To submit a plot, the batch software submits a job to the batch queue named PDisoplot. The
job that runs in PDisoplot actually launches the plot.
Since the plot jobs are launched from a separate batch queue, you can accumulate the jobs in
the queue and release them at some later time. You might also hold the jobs in PDisoplot to
prevent normal production plotting queues from getting loaded down with isometric plots.
276
________________ Creating Orthographic Drawings
10. Creating Orthographic

Drawings
Designers use the Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) product to create and/or revise
orthographic production drawings. PD_Draw creates windows (drawing views) to the live 3D
Models created with PD_Design and the other modeling products. PD_Draw is used to place
annotation labels identifying intelligent items and model coordinates, to plot the drawings,
and to produce reports for drawings and model data.
Management
10. Drawing
The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise orthographic production drawings. It can
be used by any of the 3D disciplines within PDS for drawing management.
A drawing is a sheet or a plot used to describe the design of a model design volume (work
area). Many drawings can be created from one model to completely document a design
volume. A drawing can contain more than one drawing view of a model or models.
A drawing view is a view of a model or models. Each drawing view within a drawing can
have a different scale and each label within a drawing can have a different character size.
You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the reference
model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for the
drawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These model
graphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views.
277
________________
Drawing Manager Features

The Drawing Manager can be used to:
Create a drawing for any of the PDS 3D disciplines, along with a key plan drawing.
Create multiple drawing views for a given drawing.
Revise definition information for existing drawings or drawing views.
Delete drawings and drawing views
Report on drawing information in the Project Control Database.
Report on model data in a specified drawing and drawing view(s).
Place drawing views graphically within a drawing border.
Revise drawing view characteristics, including clipping volume, orientation, reference

file attachments, and display categories.
Place annotation labels on a drawing to identify intelligent items and model

coordinates.
Create hidden-line-removed model graphics.
Plot a drawing or set of drawings.
Create a key plan model for the project.
278
________________ Drawing Manager Setup
10.1 Drawing Manager Setup

Project Setup
A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use the Drawing Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference
Guide for information on
Loading PDS 3D products.
Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.
Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.
Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.
Model Files
A set of model files for the project must be defined before you can use the Drawing
Manager.
Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulating PDS 3D
Models.
Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide
PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide
Management
10. Drawing
MicasPlus ModelDraft Reference Guide
PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide
Drawing Manager Setup

Complete the following operations before using the Drawing Manager.
Drawing Categories
When a project is created, the Project Administrator copies the default drawing category
names to the project directory. The name of the copied file is drwcats.txt. You can edit this
file to change the names that are displayed for drawing categories.
279
________________
Although you can modify the drawing category names, the meaning of a
specific category will not be altered by this change.
Cells
The flow arrow symbol for drawing annotation is provided in the cell library
win32app\pdshell\cell\drawing.cel. This cell library is copied to the project directory by the
Project Administrator as a part of project creation. The Drawing Manager attaches this
cell library each time you select a drawing for the purpose of drawing annotation.
The drawing.cel library in the project directory must be used for any cells, other than the flow
arrow, which you intend to use for drawing annotation.
Drawing Borders
The Drawing Manager uses the following guidelines to determine which drawing border to
attach.
The directory and network address for the drawing border is defined in the RDB
Management Data with the Reference Data Manager. This setting is stored in the
Project Control Database for access by the Drawing Manager.
The file specifications for the drawing borders is determined by the following naming
convention.
dwgbrd_<drawing_type>.<drawing_size>
drawing_type is the standard note number in Standard Note Type 2000 for drawing
types.
drawing_size is the text for the standard note value corresponding to the drawing size in
the Standard Note Type 1202.
For example, the drawing border name for an A size piping drawing is dwgbrd_2.a.
Drawing Plot Size Table

This table is located in the drawplotsize file and is copied from the PD_Shell delivery
directory at the time a project is created. It contains the drawing size standard notation, plot
size, the standard text for the size, and the four margins for the cutting edge. An example of a
drawplotsize file and definitions of each field follows:
! Drawing Plot Size Table

!
!Drawing Size Cutting Edge Margins from Cutting Edge (Drawing Size)
!Std Note Size X-l Y-t X-r Y-b
!
1 8.5"x11" 0.8125" 0.625" 2.125" 0.625 (A)
280
2 11"x17" 1" 0.6875" 3" 0.6875" (B)

3 17"x22" 1.1875" 0.75" 3.75" 0.75" (C)
4 24"x36" 1.375" 0.8125" 5.4375" 0.8125" (D)
5 34"x44" 1.5625" 0.875" 6.875" 0.875" (E)
6 28"x40" 1.625" 0.9375" 5.625" 0.9375" (F)
101 840mmx1189mm 56mm 35mm 198mm 35mm (A0)
102 595mmx840mm 47mm 30mm 193mm 30mm (A1)
103 420mmx595mm 38mm 27mm 190mm 27mm (A2)
104 297mmx420mm 33mm 25mm 155mm 72mm (A3)
105 210mmx297mm 28mm 24mm 65mm 24mm (A4)
Drawing Size Std Note is the standard note, which is referenced from the Standard
Note Type 1202, for the drawing size selected.
Cutting Edge Size reflects the actual size of the cutting edge around the border that is
associated with the drawing size.
Margins from Cutting Edge
X-l defines the horizontal distance from the left cutting edge for composition.
X-t defines the horizontal distance from the right cutting edge for composition.
Y-r defines the vertical distance from the top cutting edge for composition.
Y-b defines the vertical distance from the bottom cutting edge for composition.
Drawing Size is the standard note text for the drawing size.
Drawing Manager Database Table

Information
Management
10. Drawing
This section describes and includes the tables from the Default Relational Database
Definition, which is stored in the project.ddl file, that are used during the drawing process.
These tables are dedicated to the Drawing Manager task. There is interaction between these
tables and other various tables in the Project Control Database (PDTABLE_112 Design Area
Data, for example).
Project Control Database

This section describes and includes the tables from the Project Control Database that are
affected during the drawing process.
Do not edit database definitions except to modify column names.
# Drawing Data
281
________________
1 , dwg_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , drawing_no , character(24) , index 2
3 , drawing_title , character(40)
4 , default_scale , character(16)
8 , completion_status , short
10, drawing_type , short , standard note 2000 , index 3
11, last_revision_no , character(2)
12, drawing_file_spec , character(14)
13, path_name , character(36)
20, release_revision , character(2)
21, release_date , integer
22, checking_status , short , standard note 1610
# Drawing View Data
1 , dwg_view_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , dwg_view_no , character(6) , index 2
3 , dwg_view_name , character(40)
4 , dwg_view_scale , character(16)
6 , saved_view_name , character(6)
7 , viewing_direction , short , standard note 1620
8 , composition_status , short , standard note 1630
9 , dwg_view_x_low , double
10, dwg_view_y_low , double
11, dwg_view_z_low , double
12, dwg_view_x_high , double
13, dwg_view_y_high , double
14, dwg_view_z_high , double
15, vhl_category_index , short
16, drawing_view_type , short
# Drawing View Reference Model Data
1 , dwg_view_index_no , integer
# Composite Drawing View Data
1 , comp_dwg_index_no , integer , index 1

2 , comp_dwg_view_no , character(6)
3 , comp_dwg_view_name , character(40)
282
4 , comp_dwg_v_scale , character(16)
6 , dwg_view_index_a , integer
7 , dwg_view_index_b , integer
8 , dwg_view_index_c , integer
9 , dwg_view_index_d , integer
10, dwg_view_index_e , integer
11, dwg_view_index_f , integer
12, dwg_view_index_g , integer
13, dwg_view_index_h , integer
14, dwg_view_index_i , integer
15, dwg_view_index_j , integer
# Drawing Revision Data
# Drawing Setup Data

3 , drawing_scale , character(16)
6 , discipline_mask , short
7 , alternate_seed_opt , short
# Reference Model Display Category Setup Data
Management
10. Drawing

3 , category_mask_a , integer
4 , category_mask_b , integer
5 , category_mask_c , integer
6 , category_mask_d , integer
# Plotting Default Data
1 , iplot_index_no , integer
2 , iplot_number , character(24)
3 , iplot_description , character(40)
4 , iplot_file_spec , character(14)
283
________________
10.2 Drawing Seed Data

The Project Data Manager is used to revise the seed data for a specified drawing or create a
report of the RDB data. You can revise both 3D data and drawing data.
The Revise Drawing option is used to revise the seed data for a selected drawing file. The
system activates the following form which provides access to the modification options.
Select the option for the type of drawing data to be revised. The following report shows the
delivered settings for the Drawing Data.
284
Drawing Category Data
Level
Drawing View Specific Labels 4
Drawing View Indentification Labels 5
Coordinate Labels 7
Dimensioning 9
Revision Triangles and Revision Clouds 10
Hold Clouds 11
Reports 8
Miscellaneous Drawing Graphics 3
Non-Plotted Drawing Graphics 12
Battery Limits 36
Matchlines 37
Centerlines 38
Dumb Details 39
Leader Lines for Dumb Details 40
Extension Lines for Dumb Details 41
Dimensions for Dumb Details 42
Coordinates for Dumb Details 43
Like Line No Labels 44
Like Equipment No Labels 45
User-defined drawing annotation category 11 46
Hidden Line Category for View Number 1 21
Management
10. Drawing
Dashed Hidden Line Category for View Number 1 13

Drawing Graphic Symbology
Weight Colors Name
Revision Cloud 0 White

Flow Arrow 0 White FLOARR
Report 0 White
Dimension White
Miscellaneous Violet
285
________________
Field Name for Nominal Piping Diameter
Symbol Font 50
Character Size for Report Undefined,Undefined
Line Spacing Factor 0.500000
Maximum Blank Line 3
Drawing Label Sizes
Text Height Text Width
1/16" 1/16"
1/8" 1/8"
1/4" 1/4"
5/16" 5/16"
3/8" 3/8"
1/2" 1/2"
5/8" 5/8"
11/16" 11/16"
7/8" 7/8"
3/4" 3/4"
Drawing Annotation
Line
Line Text Spacing
Category Weight Symbology Color Terminator Text Size Font Factor
Battery Limits 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000

Matchlines 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Centerlines 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Dumb Details 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Leader Lines for Dumb Details 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Extension Lines for Dumb Details 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Dimensions for Dumb Details 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Coordinates for Dumb Details 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Like Line No Labels 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Like Equipment No Labels 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
User-defined drawing annotation category 11 0 Solid White 1/4", 1/4" 0 0.0000
Drawing Hidden Line Symbology
Use Default Weight
Use User Defined Symbology
Use Default Color
Drawing View Weight Symbology Color
286
Drawing View Number 1 N/A Medium Dash N/A

Management
10. Drawing
287
________________
10.3 Using Labels in Drawings

The Label Description Library contains the definitions for all the labels used in the PDS 3D
modules. Labels can be placed in the drawing as intelligent graphics with linkages to the
design database. You can update existing drawing view specific labels to reflect the latest
data in the database.
A Label Description Library is delivered in the file win32app\pdshell\lib\labels.l. You can

use the Label Description Library Manager to edit the labels to suit the needs of your
project.
10.3.1 Label Types

The following label types are used for annotation in drawings.
Displayable Attribute Labels

Each type of displayable attribute label has a description in the Label Description Library.
This description identifies the label characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font,
and the attribute data associated with the label.
A displayable attribute label consists of the text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator,
and some label enclosure graphics. This label type is further divided into the following
categories.
Drawing View Specific Label
displayable attribute labels for named model items which are placed in a drawing.
Drawing View Identification Label
labels with attribute linkages to the Drawing View Data (table 122) that report
information about the drawing view such as drawing view name and view scale
Drawing View Specific Labels are further divided into subcategories for Piping, SMS,
HVAC, and Raceways. Drawing View Specific Labels for Piping and View Independent
Labels are divided into sub-ranges for system-defined labels and user labels.
Alphanumeric Labels
Alphanumeric labels are non-intelligent user-defined labels. Each type of alphanumeric label
has a description in the Label Description Library. This description identifies the label
characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font. An alphanumeric label consists of the
text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator, and some label enclosure graphics.
288
________________ Using Labels in Drawings
Displayable Attribute Message

Each type of displayable attribute message has a description in the Label Description Library.
Unlike the other label types, the description of a displayable attribute message only contains
the attribute data. Therefore, you cannot define label description data such as color, weight,
style, and text size for a displayable attribute message.
A displayable attribute message has all or part of its text derived from the alphanumeric data
that is linked to a specified named item in the model.
A displayable attribute message is displayed temporarily at the terminal either as an

identification message or as a reporting message. Some of these messages are displayed in
the terminals refresh message fields. Other messages are displayed temporarily in the model.
The system does not place any graphics in the model for this type of label.
A displayable attribute message can also be used to create a value for another attribute, for
example, the Line Number Label attribute.
Management
10. Drawing
289
________________
10.3.2 Label Definition Data

The Label Description Library Manager is part of the Reference Data Manager. The
following forms show the label definition data used to define the line number label.
10.3.3 Drawing View Specific Labels

Label 001 defines the label definition data used to place a line number label in a drawing
view.
290
________________ Label Definition Data
10.3.4 Displayable Attribute Label

Label 310 defines the structure of the line number label.
Management
10. Drawing
291
________________
292
________________ Index
Index
3D
coordinate systems 31 C
seed data 160 categories
drawing 279
A cells 280
accessing clash
spec data 115 categories 228
activate checking
orientation tee 173 design areas 216
active design area ownership of 219
P&ID 207 ownership 219
placement point 188 precedence 228
alphanumeric client/server relationship 54
labels 288 close windows 153
analyze code list 58, 109
data 193 column 57
ASCII to binary conversion 272 commands
attribute 57 fields 154
data 193 status field 154
window 154
B commodity
base code 122, 247, 260
form 158 data 120
batch item name table 138
job input file 273 options 121
software organization 273 specification data 96
batch job input file 273 component
interface job creation (jobctl.exe) 275 manipulation commands 174
ISOGEN 276 placement
ISOGEN interface 275 examples 142
plotting 276 overview 113
batch job 28 revision 192
bend selection 138
deflection table 140 concepts
binary conversion 272 piping graphics 187
bolts connect
commodity code 260 point 96, 190
Eden data module 261 construction clash category 228
length 259, 261 control menu box 153
roundoff 259 conventions
borders forms 155
drawing 280 piping materials class code 116
branch reporting 246
insertion tables 140 coordinate
reinforcement equations 119 system
design volume 43
indicator 188
Index
293
________________
coordinate (continued) drawing (continued)

system (continued) borders 280
plant 38 categories 279
create manager
label setup 279
attribute data 265, 290 orthographic 277
creating plot size table 280
3D models 145 seed data 284
creation drwcats.txt 279
commands 191
E
D Eden
database bolt data module 261
column 57 flange data module 261
definition 59 modules 125
information 51, 57 parametric language 125
linkage 177 EE RWAY 24
requirements 195 end preparation 121
schemas 56 envelope 223
table 57 builder 223
ddl files 59 diagnostics 224
design 73 verication
project 59 errors 224
reference 87 verifications 223
default environment
display levels 148 graphics 150
define equipment
commands 174 interface 169
definition data 231 manipulation commands 174
delivered reference data 92 models 164
design number and nozzle number 206
area 216 seed data 165
clash checking 216 error
pre-defined volume 217 field 155
volume examples
coordinate system 43 component placement 142
Design Review Integrator (PD_Review) 25 extracting
diagrams isometric drawings 269
process
and instrumentation 18 F
flow 18 fabrication category 124
discrimination data features
file 232 drawing 278
record 233 field
display fit length 260
levels 147 flanges
displayable attribute Eden data module 261
labels 288 flow
message 289 diagram process 18
drawing format file 237
annotation 288 output fields 241
294
________________ Index
format file (continued) implied (continued)

syntax 237 items (continued)
column 239 labels 262
data_type 239 types 256
field_functions 238 material data 102
field_len 239 input 224
field_type 240 instrument
row 239 component specification data 99
forms loops 19
base 158 instrument data manager 19
conventions 155 instrumentation
FrameWorks Plus 20 diagrams (P&ID) 18
FW+ 20 interface
equipment modeling 169
G interference
gadgets checker
conventions 155 design area 216
gaskets 260 pre-defined volume 217
commodity name 261 input 224
gap 120 output 225
generic piping
physical data 130 design area 216
tables 136 piping design area
geometric pre-defined volume 217
industry standard 123 project 216
graphic detection 211
commodity management
data 106 clash categories 228
library interference checker
parametric shape definitions 132 input 224
physical data definitions 128 report 225
sub-symbol processor 127 units 215
symbol processors 126 intermediate data file 272
commodity library 124 introduction
symbology 147 project organization 29
graphics 187 ISOA_BGEN 272
environment 150 ISOGEN 272, 276
working in 151 interface 271, 275
green connect point 96, 121 isometric
drawings 269
H extraction 271
hard clash category 228 item name 121
HITS 272
J
I job creation 275
IDF 272 JOBCTL.EXE 275
IDM 19 jobctl.exe 275
IF_Check 22
implied K
data 249 key-in
items 256 fields 155
Index
295
________________
L minimize windows 153

label miscellaneous
description commands 174
data management model
create attribute data 265, 290 data 193
library 109 review 193
label types 288 revise 178, 193
descriptions 288 revision 192
types 288 component 192
alphanumeric labels 288 piping 192
displayable attribute segment vertex 192
labels 288 model code 121
message 289 model files 222
labels 262 modeling 145
level setup 145
control 147 modifier 123
license 28 MTO 231, 252
licenses 28 options 259
lower windows 153
N
M name from P&ID 209
maintaining report definition data 231 network
material traversal 272
descriptions 107, 246, 262 node numbers 204
reference database nominal piping diameter 117
structure nongraphic outputs 272
implied data 102 NPD 117
instrument 99
piping commodity 96 O
piping materials class 94 option
piping specialty 98 code 121
size-dependent data 101 record 274
tap properties 100 optional report type line 241
takeoff 252 options file 272
options 259 orientation
materials tee 189
grade 123 activating 173
table 118 orienting the refresh tee 171
mating orthographic drawings 277
implied output
items 256 fields 241
labels 262 overview
material descriptions 262 component placement 113
maximizing interactive isometric extraction 271, 272
windows 153 ASCII to binary conversion 272
menu Intergraph interface 271
bar 154
message P
field 155 parametric shape definitions 132
MicroStation parametrics 164
command window 154
296
________________ Index
PD_Clash 22 piping (continued)

PD_Data 21 segments 187
PD_Design 21 specialty
PD_Draw 22 specification data 98
PD_EQP 20 PJS 94
PD_ISO 23 tables and functions 104
PD_ISOGEN 23 place
pdisoplot 276 point 188
PD_LICE 28 placement
PD_Report 23 commands 191
PD_Review 25 placing
PDS components on segments 138
licenses 28 plant
placement theory 113 coordinate system 38
PDS reporting modules 235 plot
pdsidf.exe 275 sizes 280
PD_Stress 22 plotting
PE-HVAC 24 isos 276
physical positional units 35
data 128 precedence
dimension data 135 clash 228
P&ID 18 pressure 116
commodity name 209 primary axis 189
correlation table 197 primitives 164
data 208 process
data comparison options 210 and instrumentation diagrams (P&ID) 18
data transfer 195 flow diagram 18
by equipment number and nozzle number 206 processing reports 235
correlation table 197 project
database requirements 195 data manager
unit number 195, 196 revise drawing 284
update by node number 206 revise equipment model 165
update segment data 205 network environment 54
graphical data transfer 202 organization 29, 215
node numbers 204 setup 26, 221
unit number 195, 196 prompt field 155
update segment data 205
piping R
assembly RDBMS 51
library 110 red connect point 96, 121
commodity reference
implied material data 102 data
size-dependent material data 101 delivered 92
specification data 96, 120 equipment 165
connect point 190 overview 91
diameter 117 graphic commodity data 106
job specification 94 label description library 109
tables and functions 104 material description data 107
materials class data 94, 115 piping assembly library 110
models 176 piping job specification 94
revision 192 standard note library 109
Index
297
________________
refresh segment
tee piping 187
orienting 171 vertex 192
refresh graphics 187 selecting
relational interface system (ris) 51 components 138
report server/client relationship 54
data setup 221
report record 233 2D project 26
definition data 231 3D project 26
discrimination data drawing 279
file 232 project 26
record 233 sink box 154
files 232 size-dependent material data 101
format file 232, 237 soft clash category 228
syntax 237 software
format record 232 lease 28
interference 225 purchase 28
output 234 spec
processing 235 access 115
record 233 implied
records 232 items 256
report type line 241 specialty
types 235 specification data 98
reporting 231 specific
material takeoff 252 physical data 129
process 246 tables 137
reports standard note
interference 225 library 109
review status
data 193 field 154
revise sub-symbol processor 127
data 193 symbol processors 126
drawing data 284 syntax
equipment data 165 format file 237
model column 239
graphics 192 data_type 239
model data 178 field_functions 238
material takeoff options 259 field_len 239
RIS 51, 52 field_type 240
row 239
S system
sample configurations 54
report format files 242 prompt field 155
secondary
commands 175 T
secondary axis 189 table
seed data 146 access 124
3D 160 database 57
drawing 284 implied items 256, 257
equipment 165 suffix 122
piping 178
298
________________ Index
tables working
bend deflection 140 units 35
bolt length 261 working in
branch insertions 140 graphics 151
commodity item name 138 three dimensions 31
tap
properties data 100
temperature 116
transfer
from P&ID 195
type 63 data 146
type report line 241
typefaces 13
types
reports 235
U
understanding
envelopes 223
interference checking 224
interferences 211
report data 232
update
by node number 206
segment data
from P&ID 205, 207
V
valve
operator 123
view 153
volume filter 218
volumes
clash checking 216
W
wall thickness 118
equations 119
weight code 123
windows
close 153
control menu box 153, 154
lower 153
manipulations 153
maximize 153
MicroStation command 154
minimize 153
move 153
restore 153
size 153
view 153
Index
299
________________
300

3 Dtheory

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

3 Dtheory

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PDS 3D Theory

Document Number Version Date Pages

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph General Information

1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.

Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore

Related Products ................................................................................................................... 11

General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 13

Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 14

1. What is the Plant Design System? ............................................................................................... 17

1.1 What are the 2D modules? .................................................................................................. 18

1.1.1 Process Flow Diagram (PFD) ................................................................................. 18

1.2 What are the 3D modules? .................................................................................................. 20

1.2.1 Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) ............................................................................ 20

1.3 Project Setup ....................................................................................................................... 26

1.3.1 System Setup ........................................................................................................... 26

1.4 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ 29

1.5.1 Working Units ......................................................................................................... 35

1.5.5.1 Plant Coordinate System .......................................................................... 38

1.5.6 Design Volume Coordinate System ........................................................................ 43

1.5.7.1 DVCS Oriented From Plant North ........................................................... 47

2. Database Overview ...................................................................................................................... 51

2.1 PDS and the Relational Interface System (RIS) ................................................................. 52

2.2.1 Client/Server Relationship ...................................................................................... 54

2.3 PDS 3D Databases .............................................................................................................. 56

2.3.1 Database Information .............................................................................................. 57

2.3.1.1 Attribute Types ......................................................................................... 58

2.4 Database Definition Files .................................................................................................... 59

2.4.1 Project Control Database ......................................................................................... 59

3. Reference Data ............................................................................................................................. 91

3.1 Piping Job Specification ...................................................................................................... 94

3.1.1 Piping Materials Class Data .................................................................................... 94

3.1.2.1 Connect Point Data .................................................................................. 96

3.1.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data ........................................................................ 98

4. How PDS Works .......................................................................................................................... 113

4.1 What Happens When I Place a Component? ...................................................................... 113

4.1.1 Spec Access ............................................................................................................. 115

4.1.9.1 Generic Tables ......................................................................................... 136

4.2 Placing Components On Existing Segments ....................................................................... 138

4.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table ................................................................................. 138

5. Creating 3D Models ..................................................................................................................... 145

5.1 Modeling Setup Requirements ............................................................................................ 145

5.1.1 Project Setup ........................................................................................................... 145

5.2 Graphics Environment for PDS 3D ..................................................................................... 150

5.2.1 Working with the Graphical User Interface ............................................................ 151

5.2.2.1 Base Form ................................................................................................ 158

5.2.3 3D Seed Data ........................................................................................................... 160

5.3 Creating Equipment Models ............................................................................................... 164

5.3.1 Functions of PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) ............................................... 164

5.4 Equipment Modeling Commands ....................................................................................... 174

5.4.1 Equipment Manipulation Commands ..................................................................... 174

5.5 Creating Piping Models ...................................................................................................... 176

5.5.1 Piping Model Seed Data .......................................................................................... 178

5.5.2.1 Piping Segments ....................................................................................... 187

5.5.3 Orientation Tee ........................................................................................................ 189

5.5.3.1 Piping Connect Points .............................................................................. 190

5.6 Piping Design Commands ................................................................................................... 191

5.6.1 Placement Commands ............................................................................................. 191

6. P&ID to Piping Data Transfer ...................................................................................................... 195

6.1 Database Requirements ....................................................................................................... 195

6.5 Update Segment Data from P&ID ...................................................................................... 205

6.5.1 Update by Node Number ........................................................................................ 206